Go back to welcome

Rules for the Classification of

Steel Ships

PART C – Machinery, Electricity, Automation

and Fire Protection
Chapters 2 – 3

NR 467.C2 DT R03 E April 2007

17 bis, Place des Reflets - La Défense 2 - 92400 Courbevoie

Postal Address : 92077 Paris La Défense Cedex
Tel. 33 (0) 1 42 91 52 91 - Fax. 33 (0) 1 42 91 53 20
Email : [email protected]
Web : http://www.veristar.com
 MARINE DIVISION
GENERAL CONDITIONS
ARTICLE 1 ARTICLE 6
1.1. - BUREAU VERITAS is a Society the purpose of whose Marine Division (the “Society”) is the classifica- 6.1. - The Society accepts no responsibility for the use of information related to its Services which was not
tion (“Classification”) of any ship or vessel or structure of any type or part of it or system therein collectively provided for the purpose by the Society or with its assistance.
hereinafter referred to as a “Unit” whether linked to shore, river bed or sea bed or not, whether operated or
6.2. - If the Services of the Society cause to the Client a damage which is proved to be the direct and
located at sea or in inland waters or partly on land, including submarines, hovercrafts, drilling rigs, offshore
reasonably foreseeable consequence of an error or omission of the Society, its liability towards the
installations of any type and of any purpose, their related and ancillary equipment, subsea or not, such as
Client is limited to ten times the amount of fee paid for the Service having caused the damage, pro-
well head and pipelines, mooring legs and mooring points or otherwise as decided by the Society.
vided however that this limit shall be subject to a minimum of eight thousand (8,000) Euro, and to a
The Society: maximum which is the greater of eight hundred thousand (800,000) Euro and one and a half times the
• prepares and publishes Rules for classification, Guidance Notes and other documents (“Rules”); above mentioned fee.
• issues Certificates, Attestations and Reports following its interventions (“Certificates”);
The Society bears no liability for indirect or consequential loss such as e.g. loss of revenue, loss of
• publishes Registers.
profit, loss of production, loss relative to other contracts and indemnities for termination of other
1.2. - The Society also participates in the application of National and International Regulations or Standards, agreements.
in particular by delegation from different Governments. Those activities are hereafter collectively referred to
6.3. - All claims are to be presented to the Society in writing within three months of the date when the Services
as “Certification”.
were supplied or (if later) the date when the events which are relied on of were first known to the Client, and
1.3. - The Society can also provide services related to Classification and Certification such as ship and com- any claim which is not so presented shall be deemed waived and absolutely barred.
pany safety management certification; ship and port security certification, training activities; all activities and
ARTICLE 7
duties incidental thereto such as documentation on any supporting means, software, instrumentation, meas-
urements, tests and trials on board. 7.1. - Requests for Services are to be in writing.
1.4. - The interventions mentioned in 1.1., 1.2. and 1.3. are referred to as “Services”. The party and/or its rep- 7.2. - Either the Client or the Society can terminate as of right the requested Services after giving the
resentative requesting the services is hereinafter referred to as the “Client”. The Services are prepared and other party thirty days' written notice, for convenience, and without prejudice to the provisions in Ar-
carried out on the assumption that the Clients are aware of the International Maritime and/or Offshore ticle 8 hereunder.
Industry (the “Industry”) practices.
7.3. - The class granted to the concerned Units and the previously issued certificates remain valid until the
1.5. - The Society is neither and may not be considered as an Underwriter, Broker in ship’s sale or chartering, date of effect of the notice issued according to 7.2. hereabove subject to compliance with 2.3. hereabove and
Expert in Unit’s valuation, Consulting Engineer, Controller, Naval Architect, Manufacturer, Shipbuilder, Repair Article 8 hereunder.
yard, Charterer or Shipowner who are not relieved of any of their expressed or implied obligations by the
ARTICLE 8
interventions of the Society.
8.1. - The Services of the Society, whether completed or not, involve the payment of fee upon receipt of the
ARTICLE 2
invoice and the reimbursement of the expenses incurred.
2.1. - Classification is the appraisement given by the Society for its Client, at a certain date, following surveys
8.2. - Overdue amounts are increased as of right by interest in accordance with the applicable legis-
by its Surveyors along the lines specified in Articles 3 and 4 hereafter on the level of compliance of a Unit to
lation.
its Rules or part of them. This appraisement is represented by a class entered on the Certificates and peri-
odically transcribed in the Society’s Register. 8.3. - The class of a Unit may be suspended in the event of non-payment of fee after a first unfruitful
notification to pay.
2.2. - Certification is carried out by the Society along the same lines as set out in Articles 3 and 4 hereafter
and with reference to the applicable National and International Regulations or Standards. ARTICLE 9
2.3. - It is incumbent upon the Client to maintain the condition of the Unit after surveys, to present the 9.1. - The documents and data provided to or prepared by the Society for its Services, and the information
Unit for surveys and to inform the Society without delay of circumstances which may affect the given available to the Society, are treated as confidential. However:
appraisement or cause to modify its scope. • Clients have access to the data they have provided to the Society and, during the period of classification
of the Unit for them, to the classification file consisting of survey reports and certificates which have been
2.4. - The Client is to give to the Society all access and information necessary for the performance of the re-
prepared at any time by the Society for the classification of the Unit ;
quested Services.
• copy of the documents made available for the classification of the Unit and of available survey reports can
ARTICLE 3 be handed over to another Classification Society Member of the International Association of Classifica-
tion Societies (IACS) in case of the Unit’s transfer of class;
3.1. - The Rules, procedures and instructions of the Society take into account at the date of their preparation
• the data relative to the evolution of the Register, to the class suspension and to the survey status of the
the state of currently available and proven technical knowledge of the Industry. They are not a code of con-
Units are passed on to IACS according to the association working rules;
struction neither a guide for maintenance or a safety handbook.
• the certificates, documents and information relative to the Units classed with the Society may be reviewed
Committees consisting of personalities from the Industry contribute to the development of those documents. during IACS audits and are disclosed upon order of the concerned governmental or inter-governmental
authorities or of a Court having jurisdiction.
3.2. - The Society only is qualified to apply its Rules and to interpret them. Any reference to them has
no effect unless it involves the Society’s intervention. The documents and data are subject to a file management plan.
3.3. - The Services of the Society are carried out by professional Surveyors according to the Code of Ethics ARTICLE 10
of the Members of the International Association of Classification Societies (IACS).
10.1. - Any delay or shortcoming in the performance of its Services by the Society arising from an event not
3.4. - The operations of the Society in providing its Services are exclusively conducted by way of ran- reasonably foreseeable by or beyond the control of the Society shall be deemed not to be a breach of con-
dom inspections and do not in any circumstances involve monitoring or exhaustive verification. tract.
ARTICLE 4 ARTICLE 11
4.1. - The Society, acting by reference to its Rules: 11.1. - In case of diverging opinions during surveys between the Client and the Society’s surveyor, the Society
• reviews the construction arrangements of the Units as shown on the documents presented by the Client; may designate another of its surveyors at the request of the Client.
• conducts surveys at the place of their construction;
11.2. - Disagreements of a technical nature between the Client and the Society can be submitted by the So-
• classes Units and enters their class in its Register;
ciety to the advice of its Marine Advisory Committee.
• surveys periodically the Units in service to note that the requirements for the maintenance of class are
met. ARTICLE 12
The Client is to inform the Society without delay of circumstances which may cause the date or the 12.1. - Disputes over the Services carried out by delegation of Governments are assessed within the frame-
extent of the surveys to be changed. work of the applicable agreements with the States, international Conventions and national rules.
ARTICLE 5 12.2. - Disputes arising out of the payment of the Society’s invoices by the Client are submitted to the Court
of Nanterre, France.
5.1. - The Society acts as a provider of services. This cannot be construed as an obligation bearing
on the Society to obtain a result or as a warranty. 12.3. - Other disputes over the present General Conditions or over the Services of the Society are ex-
clusively submitted to arbitration, by three arbitrators, in London according to the Arbitration Act
5.2. - The certificates issued by the Society pursuant to 5.1. here above are a statement on the level
1996 or any statutory modification or re-enactment thereof. The contract between the Society and the
of compliance of the Unit to its Rules or to the documents of reference for the Services provided for.
Client shall be governed by English law.
In particular, the Society does not engage in any work relating to the design, building, production or
ARTICLE 13
repair checks, neither in the operation of the Units or in their trade, neither in any advisory services,
and cannot be held liable on those accounts. Its certificates cannot be construed as an implied or ex- 13.1. - These General Conditions constitute the sole contractual obligations binding together the So-
press warranty of safety, fitness for the purpose, seaworthiness of the Unit or of its value for sale, ciety and the Client, to the exclusion of all other representation, statements, terms, conditions wheth-
insurance or chartering. er express or implied. They may be varied in writing by mutual agreement.
5.3. - The Society does not declare the acceptance or commissioning of a Unit, nor of its construction 13.2. - The invalidity of one or more stipulations of the present General Conditions does not affect the validity
in conformity with its design, that being the exclusive responsibility of its owner or builder, respec- of the remaining provisions.
tively.
13.3. - The definitions herein take precedence over any definitions serving the same purpose which may ap-
5.4. - The Services of the Society cannot create any obligation bearing on the Society or constitute any war- pear in other documents issued by the Society.
ranty of proper operation, beyond any representation set forth in the Rules, of any Unit, equipment or machin-
ery, computer software of any sort or other comparable concepts that has been subject to any survey by the BV Mod. Ad. ME 545 j - 16 February 2004
Society.
 RULES FOR THE CLASSIFICATION OF SHIPS

Part C
Machinery, Electricity, Automation and
Fire Protection

Chapters 1 2 3 4

Chapter 1 MACHINERY
Chapter 2 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS
Chapter 3 AUTOMATION
Chapter 4 FIRE PROTECTION, DETECTION AND EXTINCTION

April 2007
 The English wording of these rules take precedence over editions in
other languages.

Unless otherwise specified, these rules apply to ships for which contracts are
signed after July 1st, 2007. The Society may refer to the contents hereof
before July 1st, 2007, as and when deemed necessary or appropriate.

2 Bureau Veritas April 2007

C HAPTER 2
E LECTRICAL I NSTALLATIONS

Section 1 General
1 Application 19
1.1 General
1.2 References to other regulations and standards
2 Documentation to be submitted 19
2.1
3 Definitions 19
3.1 General
3.2 Essential services
3.3 Primary essential services
3.4 Secondary essential services
3.5 Safety voltage
3.6 Low-voltage systems
3.7 High-voltage systems
3.8 Basic insulation
3.9 Supplementary insulation
3.10 Double insulation
3.11 Reinforced insulation
3.12 Earthing
3.13 Normal operational and habitable condition
3.14 Emergency condition
3.15 Main source of electrical power
3.16 Dead ship condition
3.17 Main generating station
3.18 Main switchboard
3.19 Emergency switchboard
3.20 Emergency source of electrical power
3.21 Section boards
3.22 Distribution board
3.23 Final sub-circuit
3.24 Hazardous areas
3.25 High fire risk areas
3.26 Certified safe-type equipment
3.27 Environmental categories

Section 2 General Design Requirements

1 Environmental conditions 24
1.1 General
1.2 Ambient air temperatures
1.3 Humidity
1.4 Sea water temperatures
1.5 Salt mist
1.6 Inclinations
1.7 Vibrations

April 2007 Bureau Veritas 3

 2 Quality of power supply 24
2.1 General
2.2 a.c. distribution systems
2.3 d.c. distribution systems
2.4 Harmonic distortions
3 Electromagnetic susceptibility 26
3.1
4 Materials 26
4.1 General
4.2 Insulating materials for windings
4.3 Insulating materials for cables
5 Construction 26
5.1 General
5.2 Degree of protection of enclosures
6 Protection against explosion hazard 27
6.1 Protection against explosive gas or vapour atmosphere hazard
6.2 Protection against combustible dust hazard

Section 3 System Design

1 Supply systems and characteristics of the supply 28
1.1 Supply systems
1.2 Maximum voltages
2 Sources of electrical power 28
2.1 General
2.2 Main source of electrical power
2.3 Emergency source of electrical power
2.4 Use of emergency generator in port
3 Distribution 32
3.1 Earthed distribution systems
3.2 Insulated distribution systems
3.3 Distribution systems with hull return
3.4 General requirements for distribution systems
3.5 Main distribution of electrical power
3.6 Emergency distribution of electrical power
3.7 Shore supply
3.8 Supply of motors
3.9 Specific requirements for special power services
3.10 Power supply to heaters
3.11 Power supply to final sub-circuits: socket outlet and lighting
3.12 Navigation lights
3.13 General emergency alarm system
3.14 Public address system
3.15 Combined general emergency alarm-public address system
3.16 Control and indication circuits
3.17 Power supply to the speed control systems of main propulsion engines
3.18 Power supply to the speed control systems of generator sets
3.19 Installation of water-based local application fire-fighting systems (FWBLAFFS)

4 Bureau Veritas April 2007

 4 Degrees of protection of the enclosures 38
4.1 General
4.2 Installation of electrical and electronic equipment in engine rooms protected by
fixed water-based local application fire-fighting systems (FWBLAFFS)

5 Diversity (demand) factors 38

5.1 General

6 Environmental categories of the equipment 40

6.1 Environmental categories

7 Electrical protection 40
7.1 General requirements for overcurrent protection
7.2 Short-circuit currents
7.3 Selection of equipment
7.4 Protection against short-circuit
7.5 Continuity of supply and continuity of service
7.6 Protection against overload
7.7 Localisation of overcurrent protection
7.8 Protection of generators
7.9 Protection of circuits
7.10 Protection of motors
7.11 Protection of storage batteries
7.12 Protection of shore power connection
7.13 Protection of measuring instruments, pilot lamps and control circuits
7.14 Protection of transformers

8 System components 44
8.1 General

9 Electrical cables 44
9.1 General
9.2 Choice of insulation
9.3 Choice of protective covering
9.4 Cables in refrigerated spaces
9.5 Cables in areas with a risk of explosion
9.6 Cables in circuits required to be operable under fire condition
9.7 Cables for submerged bilge pumps
9.8 Internal wiring of switchboards and other enclosures for equipment
9.9 Current carrying capacity of cables
9.10 Minimum nominal cross-sectional area of conductors
9.11 Choice of cables

10 Electrical installations in hazardous areas 49

10.1 Electrical equipment
10.2 Electrical cables
10.3 Electrical installations in battery rooms
10.4 Electrical installations in paint stores or enclosed spaces leading to paint stores
10.5 Electrical installations in stores for welding gas (acetylene) bottles
10.6 Special ships

April 2007 Bureau Veritas 5

 Section 4 Rotating Machines
1 Constructional and operational requirements for generators and motors 52
1.1 Mechanical construction
1.2 Sliprings, commutators and brushes
1.3 Terminal connectors
1.4 Electrical insulation

2 Special requirements for generators 52

2.1 Prime movers, speed governors and overspeed protection
2.2 A.c. generators

3 Testing of rotating machines 53

3.1 General
3.2 Shaft material
3.3 Tests

4 Description of test 53
4.1 Technical documentation and visual inspection
4.2 Insulation resistance measurement
4.3 Winding resistance measurement
4.4 Verification of the voltage regulation
4.5 Rated load test and temperature rise measurements
4.6 Overload/ overcurrent test
4.7 Verification of the steady short circuit current
4.8 Overspeed test
4.9 Dielectric strength test
4.10 No load test
4.11 Verification of degree of protection
4.12 Verification of bearings

5 Additional tests for rotating machines used as propulsion motor

or thruster 56
5.1 General

Section 5 Transformers
1 Constructional and operational requirements 57
1.1 Construction
1.2 Terminals
1.3 Voltage variation, short-circuit conditions and parallel operation
1.4 Electrical insulation and temperature rise
1.5 Insulation tests

2 Testing 58
2.1 General
2.2 Tests on transformers

6 Bureau Veritas April 2007

 Section 6 Semiconductor Convertors
1 Constructional and operational requirements 59
1.1 Construction
1.2 Protection
1.3 Parallel operation with other power sources
1.4 Temperature rise
1.5 Insulation test
2 Requirements for uninterruptible power system (UPS) units
as alternative and/or transitional power 60
2.1 Definitions
2.2 Design and construction
2.3 Location
2.4 Performance
3 Testing 60
3.1 General
3.2 Tests on convertors
3.3 Additional testing and survey for uninterruptible power system (UPS) units as
alternative and/or transitional power

Section 7 Storage Batteries and Chargers

1 Constructional requirements for batteries 62
1.1 General
1.2 Vented batteries
1.3 Valve-regulated sealed batteries
1.4 Tests on batteries
2 Constructional requirements for chargers 62
2.1 Characteristics
2.2 Tests on chargers

Section 8 Switchgear and Controlgear Assemblies

1 Constructional requirements for main and emergency switchboards 64
1.1 Construction
1.2 Busbars and bare conductors
1.3 Internal wiring
1.4 Switchgear and controlgear
1.5 Auxiliary circuits
1.6 Instruments
2 Constructional requirements for section boards and distribution boards 66
2.1 Construction
3 Testing 66
3.1 General
3.2 Inspection of equipment, check of wiring and electrical operation test
3.3 High voltage test
3.4 Measurement of insulation resistance

April 2007 Bureau Veritas 7

 Section 9 Cables
1 Constructional requirements 68
1.1 Construction
1.2 Conductors
1.3 Insulating materials
1.4 Inner covering, fillers and binders
1.5 Protective coverings (armour and sheath)
1.6 Identification
2 Testing 69
2.1 Type tests
2.2 Routine tests

Section 10 Miscellaneous Equipment

1 Switchgear and controlgear, protective devices 70
1.1 General
1.2 Circuit-breakers
1.3 Protection devices
2 Lighting fittings 70
2.1 Applicable requirements
2.2 Construction
3 Accessories 70
3.1 Applicable requirements
3.2 Construction
4 Plug-and-socket connections 71
4.1 Applicable requirements
5 Heating and cooking appliances 71
5.1 Applicable requirements
5.2 General
5.3 Space heaters
5.4 Cooking appliances
5.5 Fuel oil and lube oil heaters
5.6 Water heaters

Section 11 Location
1 General 72
1.1 Location
1.2 Areas with a risk of explosion
2 Main electrical system 72
2.1 Location in relation to the emergency system
2.2 Main switchboard

8 Bureau Veritas April 2007

 3 Emergency electrical system 72
3.1 Spaces for the emergency source
3.2 Location in relation to the main electrical system
3.3 Emergency switchboard
3.4 Emergency battery
4 Distribution boards 73
4.1 Distribution boards for cargo spaces and similar spaces
4.2 Distribution board for navigation lights
5 Cable runs 73
5.1 General
5.2 Location of cables in relation to the risk of fire and overheating
5.3 Location of cables in relation to electromagnetic interference
5.4 Services with a duplicate feeder
5.5 Emergency circuits
5.6 Electrical distribution in passenger ships
6 Storage batteries 74
6.1 General
6.2 Large vented batteries
6.3 Moderate vented batteries
6.4 Small vented batteries
6.5 Ventilation

Section 12 Installation
1 General 76
1.1 Protection against injury or damage caused by electrical equipment
1.2 Protection against damage to electrical equipment
1.3 Accessibility
1.4 Electrical equipment in environmentally controlled spaces
2 Earthing of non-current carrying parts 76
2.1 Parts which are to be earthed
2.2 Methods of earthing
2.3 Earthing connections
2.4 Connection to the ship’s structure
2.5 Earthed distribution systems
2.6 Aluminium superstructures
3 Rotating machines 78
3.1
4 Semiconductor convertors 78
4.1 Semiconductor power convertors
5 Vented type storage batteries 78
5.1 General
5.2 Protection against corrosion
6 Switchgear and controlgear assemblies 78
6.1 Main switchboard
6.2 Emergency switchboard
6.3 Section boards and distribution boards

April 2007 Bureau Veritas 9

 7 Cables 79
7.1 General
7.2 Radius of bend
7.3 Fixing of cables
7.4 Mechanical protection
7.5 Penetrations of bulkheads and decks
7.6 Expansion joints
7.7 Cables in closed pipes or conduits
7.8 Cables in casings or trunking and conduits with removable covers
7.9 Cable ends
7.10 Joints and tappings (branch circuit)
7.11 Earthing and continuity of metal coverings of cables
7.12 Earthing and continuity of metal pipes, conduits and trunking or casings
7.13 Precautions for single-core cables for a.c.
7.14 Cables in refrigerated spaces
7.15 Cables in areas with a risk of explosion
7.16 Cables and apparatus for services requi-red to be operable under fire conditions
7.17 Cables in the vicinity of radio equipment
7.18 Cables for submerged bilge pumps
7.19 Cable trays/protective casings made of plastics materials
8 Various appliances 84
8.1 Lighting fittings
8.2 Heating appliances
8.3 Heating cables and tapes or other heating elements

Section 13 High Voltage Installations

1 General 86
1.1 Field of application
1.2 Nominal system voltage
1.3 High-voltage, low-voltage segregation
2 System design 86
2.1 Distribution
2.2 Degrees of protection
2.3 Insulation
2.4 Protection
3 Rotating machinery 87
3.1 Stator windings of generators
3.2 Temperature detectors
3.3 Tests
4 Power transformers 87
4.1 General
5 Cables 87
5.1 General
6 Switchgear and controlgear assemblies 88
6.1 General
6.2 Construction
6.3 Auxiliary systems
6.4 High voltage test

10 Bureau Veritas April 2007

 7 Installation 88
7.1 Electrical equipment
7.2 Cables

Section 14 Electric Propulsion Plant

1 General 90
1.1 Applicable requirements
1.2 Operating conditions
2 Design of the propulsion plant 90
2.1 General
2.2 Power supply
2.3 Auxiliary machinery
2.4 Electrical Protection
2.5 Excitation of electric propulsion motor
3 Construction of rotating machines and semiconductor convertors 91
3.1 Ventilation
3.2 Protection against moisture and condensate
3.3 Rotating machines
3.4 Semiconductor convertors
4 Control and monitoring 92
4.1 General
4.2 Power plant control systems
4.3 Indicating instruments
4.4 Alarm system
4.5 Reduction of power
5 Installation 93
5.1 Ventilation of spaces
5.2 Cable runs
6 Tests 93
6.1 Test of rotating machines
7 Specific requirements for PODs 94
7.1 General
7.2 Rotating commutator
7.3 Electric motor
7.4 Instrumentation and associated devices
7.5 Additional tests and tests on board

Section 15 Testing
1 General 95
1.1 Rule application
1.2 Insulation-testing instruments
2 Type approved components 95
2.1

April 2007 Bureau Veritas 11

 3 Insulation resistance 95
3.1 Lighting and power circuits
3.2 Internal communication circuits
3.3 Switchboards
3.4 Generators and motors
4 Earth 95
4.1 Electrical constructions
4.2 Metal-sheathed cables, metal pipes or conduits
5 Operational tests 96
5.1 Generating sets and their protective devices
5.2 Switchgear
5.3 Consuming devices
5.4 Communication systems
5.5 Installations in areas with a risk of explosion
5.6 Voltage drop

Appendix 1 Indirect Test Method for Synchronous Machines

1 General 97
1.1 Test method

12 Bureau Veritas April 2007

C HAPTER 3
A UTOMATION

Section 1 General Requirements

1 General 101
1.1 Field of application
1.2 Regulations and standards
1.3 Definitions
1.4 General
2 Documentation 102
2.1 General
2.2 Documents to be submitted
2.3 Documents for computer based system
2.4 Documents for type approval of equipment
3 Environmental and supply conditions 103
3.1 General
3.2 Power supply conditions
4 Materials and construction 104
4.1 General
4.2 Type approved components
5 Alterations and additions 104
5.1

Section 2 Design Requirements

1 General 105
1.1
2 Power supply of automation systems 105
2.1
3 Control systems 105
3.1 General
3.2 Local control
3.3 Remote control systems
3.4 Automatic control systems
4 Control of propulsion machinery 106
4.1 Remote control
4.2 Remote control from navigating bridge
4.3 Automatic control
4.4 Automatic control of propulsion and manoeuvring units
4.5 Clutches
4.6 Brakes
5 Remote control of valves 107
5.1

April 2007 Bureau Veritas 13

 6 Alarm system 107
6.1 General requirements
6.2 Alarm functions
7 Safety system 108
7.1 Design
7.2 Function
7.3 Shutdown
7.4 Standby systems
7.5 Testing

Section 3 Computer Based Systems

1 General requirements 109
1.1 General
1.2 System type approval
1.3 System operation
1.4 System reliability
1.5 System failure
1.6 System redundancy
2 Hardware 109
2.1 General
2.2 Housing
3 Software 109
3.1 General
3.2 Software development quality
4 Data transmission link 110
4.1 General
4.2 Hardware support
4.3 Transmission software
4.4 Transmission operation
4.5 Redundant network
5 Man-machine interface 110
5.1 General
5.2 System functional indication
5.3 Input devices
5.4 Output devices
5.5 Workstations
5.6 Computer dialogue
6 Integrated systems 111
6.1 General
7 Expert system 111
7.1
8 System testing 112
8.1
9 System maintenance 112
9.1 Maintenance

14 Bureau Veritas April 2007

 Section 4 Constructional Requirements
1 General 113
1.1 General
1.2 Materials
1.3 Component design
1.4 Environmental and supply conditions

2 Electrical and/or electronic systems 113

2.1 General
2.2 Electronic system
2.3 Electrical system
3 Pneumatic systems 114
3.1
4 Hydraulic systems 114
4.1
5 Automation consoles 114
5.1 General
5.2 Indicating instruments
5.3 VDU’s and keyboards

Section 5 Installation Requirements

1 General 115
1.1

2 Sensors and components 115

2.1 General
2.2 Temperature elements
2.3 Pressure elements
2.4 Level switches
3 Cables 115
3.1 Installation
3.2 Cable terminations
4 Pipes 116
4.1

5 Automation consoles 116

5.1 General

Section 6 Testing
1 General 117
1.1 General

April 2007 Bureau Veritas 15

 2 Type approval 117
2.1 General
2.2 Hardware type approval
2.3 Software type approval
2.4 Navigational and radio equipment
2.5 Loading instruments
3 Acceptance testing 123
3.1 General
3.2 Hardware testing
3.3 Software testing
4 On board tests 124
4.1 General

16 Bureau Veritas April 2007

 Part C
Machinery, Electricity, Automation and
Fire Protection

Chapter 2

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS

SECTION 1 GENERAL

SECTION 2 GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 3 SYSTEM DESIGN

SECTION 4 ROTATING MACHINES

SECTION 5 TRANSFORMERS

SECTION 6 SEMICONDUCTOR CONVERTORS

SECTION 7 STORAGE BATTERIES AND CHARGERS

SECTION 8 SWITCHGEAR AND CONTROLGEAR ASSEMBLIES

SECTION 9 CABLES

SECTION 10 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT

SECTION 11 LOCATION

SECTION 12 INSTALLATION

SECTION 13 HIGH VOLTAGE INSTALLATIONS

SECTION 14 ELECTRIC PROPULSION PLANT

SECTION 15 TESTING

APPENDIX 1 INDIRECT TEST METHOD FOR SYNCHRONOUS MACHINES

April 2007 Bureau Veritas 17

18 Bureau Veritas April 2007
 Pt C, Ch 2, Sec 1

SECTION 1 GENERAL

1 Application 3 Definitions

1.1 General 3.1 General

1.1.1 The requirements of this Chapter apply to electrical 3.1.1 Unless otherwise stated, the terms used in this Chap-
installations on ships. In particular, they apply to the com- ter have the definitions laid down by the IEC standards.
ponents of electrical installations for:
The definitions given in the following requirements also apply.
• primary essential services
• secondary essential services
3.2 Essential services
• essential services for special purposes connected with
ships specifically intended for such purposes (e.g. cargo 3.2.1 Essential services are defined in Pt A, Ch 1, Sec 1,
pumps on tankers, cargo refrigerating systems, air con- [1.2.1]. They are subdivised in primary and secondary
ditioning systems on passenger ships) essential services.
• services for habitability.
The other parts of the installation are to be so designed as not 3.3 Primary essential services
to introduce any risks or malfunctions to the above services.
3.3.1 Primary essential services are those which need to be
1.1.2 The Society may consider modified requirements for maintained in continuous operation.
installations not exceeding either 50 V or 50 kW total genera-
Examples of equipment for primary essential services are
tor capacity (and for ships classed for “restricted navigation”).
the following:
• steering gear
1.2 References to other regulations and
standards • actuating systems of controllable pitch propellers
• scavenging air blowers, fuel oil supply pumps, fuel
1.2.1 The Society may refer to other regulations and stand- valve cooling pumps, lubricating oil pumps and cooling
ards when deemed necessary. These include the IEC publi- water pumps for main and auxiliary engines and tur-
cations, notably the IEC 60092 series. bines necessary for the propulsion
1.2.2 When referred to by the Society, publications by the • forced draught fans, feed water pumps, water circulating
International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) or other pumps, condensate pumps, oil burning installations, for
internationally recognised standards, are those currently in steam plants or steam turbines ship, and also for auxil-
force at the date of agreement for ship classification. iary boilers on ship where steam is used for equipment
supplying primary essential services
2 Documentation to be submitted • azimuth thrusters which are the sole means for propul-
sion/steering with lubricating oil pumps, cooling water
2.1 pumps
• electrical equipment for electric propulsion plant with
2.1.1 The documents listed in Tab 1 are to be submitted. lubricating oil pumps and cooling water pumps
The list of documents requested is to be intended as guid- • electric generators and associated power sources sup-
ance for the complete set of information to be submitted, plying the above equipment
rather than an actual list of titles.
• hydraulic pumps supplying the above equipment
The Society reserves the right to request the submission of
additional documents in the case of non-conventional • viscosity control equipment for heavy fuel oil
design or if it is deemed necessary for the evaluation of the • control, monitoring and safety devices/systems for
system, equipment or components. equipment for primary essential services
Unless otherwise agreed with the Society, documents for • speed regulators dependent on electrical energy for
approval are to be sent in triplicate if submitted by the Ship- main or auxiliary engines necessary for propulsion
yard and in four copies if submitted by the equipment supplier.
• starting equipment of diesel engines and gas turbines.
Documents requested for information are to be sent in
duplicate. The main lighting system for those parts of the ship nor-
In any case, the Society reserves the right to require addi- mally accessible to and used by personnel and passengers
tional copies when deemed necessary. is also considered (included as) a primary essential service.

April 2007 Bureau Veritas 19

Pt C, Ch 2, Sec 1

Table 1 : Documents to be submitted

N° I/A (1) Documents to be submitted

1 A General arrangement of electrical installation.
2 A Single line diagram of main and emergency power and lighting systems.
3 I Electrical power balance (main and emergency supply).
4 A Calculation of short-circuit currents for each installation in which the sum of rated power of the energy sources
which may be connected contemporaneously to the network is greater than 500 kVA (kW).
5 A Where the maximal short-circuit current on the main bus-bar is expected to exceed 50 kA for the main and
emergency switchboards, justification of the main bus-bar and bracket strength related to induced electro-
magnetic forces (except junction bars to the interrupting and protective devices).
6 A List of circuits including, for each supply and distribution circuit, data concerning the nominal current, the cable
type, length and cross-section, nominal and setting values of the protective and control devices.
7 A Single line diagram and detailed diagram of the main switchboard.
8 A Single line diagram and detailed diagram of the emergency switchboard.
9 A Diagram of the most important section boards or motor control centres (above 100 kW).
10 A Diagram of the supply for monitoring and control systems of propulsion motors and generator prime movers.
11 A Diagram of the supply, monitoring and control systems of the rudder propellers.
12 A Diagram of the supply, monitoring and control systems of controllable pitch propellers.
13 A Diagram of the general emergency alarm system, of the public address system and other intercommunication
systems.
14 A Detailed diagram of the navigation-light switchboard.
15 A Diagram of the remote stop system (ventilation, fuel pump, fuel valves, etc.).
16 A List of batteries including type and manufacturer, voltage and capacity, location and equipment and/or system(s)
served, (when used for essential and emergency services).
17 A (2) Selectivity and coordination of the electrical protection.
18 A (3) Single line diagram.
19 A (3) Principles of control system and its power supply.
20 A (3) Alarm and monitoring system including:
• list of alarms and monitoring points
• power supply diagram.
21 A (3) Safety system including:
• list of monitored parameters for safety system
• power supply diagram.
22 I (3) Arrangements and details of the propulsion control consoles and panels.
23 I (3) Arrangements and details of electrical coupling.
24 I (3) Arrangements and details of the frequency convertors together with the justification of their characteristics.
25 I (3) Arrangements of the cooling system provided for the frequency convertor and motor enclosure.
26 A (3) Test program for convertors and rotating machines having rated power > 3 MW, dock and sea trials.
(1) A : To be submitted for approval
I : To be submitted for information.
(2) For high voltage installations.
(3) For electric propulsion installations.

3.4 Secondary essential services • windlasses

• thrusters
3.4.1 Secondary essential services are those services which • fuel oil transfer pumps and fuel oil treatment equipment
need not necessarily be in continuous operation.
• lubrication oil transfer pumps and lubrication oil treat-
Examples of equipment for secondary essential services are ment equipment
the following: • preheaters for heavy fuel oil

20 Bureau Veritas April 2007

 Pt C, Ch 2, Sec 1

• sea water pumps 3.8 Basic insulation

• starting air and control air compressors
3.8.1 Insulation applied to live parts to provide basic pro-
• bilge, ballast and heeling pumps
tection against electric shock.
• fire pumps and other fire-extinguishing medium pumps Note 1: Basic insulation does not necessarily include insulation
• ventilation fans for engine and boiler rooms used exclusively for functional purposes.
• services considered necessary to maintain dangerous
cargo in a safe condition 3.9 Supplementary insulation
• navigation lights, aids and signals
3.9.1 Independent insulation applied in addition to basic
• internal safety communication equipment insulation in order to provide protection against electric
• fire detection and alarm systems shock in the event of a failure of basic insulation.
• electrical equipment for watertight closing appliances
• electric generators and associated power supplying the 3.10 Double insulation
above equipment
3.10.1 Insulation comprising both basic insulation and sup-
• hydraulic pumps supplying the above mentioned equip- plementary insulation.
ment
• control, monitoring and safety for cargo containment 3.11 Reinforced insulation
systems
• control, monitoring and safety devices/systems for equip- 3.11.1 A single insulation system applied to live parts,
ment for secondary essential services. which provides a degree of protection against electric shock
• cooling system of environmentally controlled spaces. equivalent to double insulation.
Note 1: The term "insulation system" does not imply that the insula-
3.4.2 Services for habitability are those intended for mini- tion must be one homogeneous piece. It may comprise several lay-
mum comfort conditions for people on board. ers which cannot be tested singly as supplementary or basic
insulation.
Examples of equipment for maintaining conditions of habit-
ability:
3.12 Earthing
• cooking
• heating 3.12.1 The earth connection to the general mass of the hull
• domestic refrigeration of the ship in such a manner as will ensure at all times an
immediate discharge of electrical energy without danger.
• mechanical ventilation
• sanitary and fresh water
3.13 Normal operational and habitable condition
• electric generators and associated power sources sup-
plying the above equipment. 3.13.1 A condition under which the ship as a whole, the
machinery, services, means and aids ensuring propulsion,
3.5 Safety voltage ability to steer, safe navigation, fire and flooding safety,
internal and external communications and signals, means of
3.5.1 A voltage which does not exceed 50 V a.c. r.m.s. escape, and emergency boat winches, as well as the
between conductors, or between any conductor and earth, designed comfortable conditions of habitability are in work-
in a circuit isolated from the supply by means such as a ing order and functioning normally.
safety isolating transformer.
3.14 Emergency condition
3.5.2 A voltage which does not exceed 50 V d.c. between
conductors or between any conductor and earth in a circuit 3.14.1 A condition under which any services needed for
isolated from higher voltage circuits. normal operational and habitable conditions are not in
working order due to failure of the main source of electrical
3.6 Low-voltage systems power.

3.6.1 Alternating current systems with rated voltages 3.15 Main source of electrical power
greater than 50 V r.m.s. up to 1000 V r.m.s. inclusive and
direct current systems with a maximum instantaneous value 3.15.1 A source intended to supply electrical power to the
of the voltage under rated operating conditions greater than main switchboard for distribution to all services necessary
50 V up to 1500 V inclusive. for maintaining the ship in normal operational and habitable
condition.
3.7 High-voltage systems
3.16 Dead ship condition
3.7.1 Alternating current systems with rated voltages
greater than 1000 V r.m.s. and direct current systems with a 3.16.1 The condition under which the main propulsion
maximum instantaneous value of the voltage under rated plant, boilers and auxiliaries are not in operation due to the
operating conditions greater than 1500 V. absence of power.

April 2007 Bureau Veritas 21

Pt C, Ch 2, Sec 1

Note 1: Dead ship condition is a condition in which the entire 3.24.2 Hazardous areas are classified in zones based upon
machinery installation, including the power supply, is out of opera- the frequency and the duration of the occurrence of explo-
tion and the auxiliary services such as compressed air, starting cur- sive atmosphere.
rent from batteries etc., for bringing the main propulsion into
operation and for the restoration of the main power supply are not 3.24.3 Hazardous areas for explosive gas atmosphere are
available. classified in the following zones:
• Zone 0: an area in which an explosive gas atmosphere
3.17 Main generating station is present continuously or is present for long periods
• Zone 1: an area in which an explosive gas atmosphere
3.17.1 The space in which the main source of electrical is likely to occur in normal operation
power is situated.
• Zone 2: an area in which an explosive gas atmosphere
is not likely to occur in normal operation and if it does
3.18 Main switchboard occur, is likely to do only infrequently and will exist for
a short period only.
3.18.1 A switchboard which is directly supplied by the
main source of electrical power and is intended to distribute
3.25 High fire risk areas
electrical energy to the ship’s services.
3.25.1 The high fire risk areas are defined as follows:
3.19 Emergency switchboard a) machinery spaces as defined in Ch 4, Sec 1, [3.23]
b) spaces containing fuel treatment equipment and other
3.19.1 A switchboard which in the event of failure of the
highly inflammable substances
main electrical power supply system is directly supplied by
the emergency source of electrical power or the transitional c) galleys and pantries containing cooking appliances
source of emergency and is intended to distribute electrical d) laundry with drying equipment
energy to the emergency services. e) spaces as defined in Ch 4, Sec 5, [1.3.4] b) for ships car-
rying more than 36 passengers, as:
3.20 Emergency source of electrical power • (8) accomodation spaces of greater fire risk
• (12) machinery spaces and main galleys
3.20.1 A source of electrical power, intended to supply the
• (14) other spaces in which flammable liquids are
emergency switchboard in the event of failure of the supply
stowed
from the main source of electrical power.
f) enclosed or semi-enclosed hazardous spaces, in which
certified safe type electric equipment is required.
3.21 Section boards

3.21.1 A switchgear and controlgear assembly which is 3.26 Certified safe-type equipment
supplied by another assembly and arranged for the distribu-
3.26.1 Certified safe-type equipment is electrical equipment
tion of electrical energy to other section boards or distribu-
of a type for which a national or other appropriate authority
tion boards.
has carried out the type verifications and tests necessary to
certify the safety of the equipment with regard to explosion
3.22 Distribution board hazard when used in an explosive gas atmosphere.

3.22.1 A switchgear and controlgear assembly arranged for 3.27 Environmental categories
the distribution of electrical energy to final sub-circuits.
3.27.1 Electrical equipment is classified into environmental
3.23 Final sub-circuit categories according to the temperature range, vibration
levels, and resistance to chemically active substances and
3.23.1 That portion of a wiring system extending beyond to humidity.
the final required overcurrent protective device of a board. The designation of the environmental categories is indi-
cated by the EC Code in Tab 2.
3.24 Hazardous areas The first characteristic numeral indicates the temperature
range in which the electrical equipment operates satisfacto-
3.24.1 Areas in which an explosive atmosphere is or may rily, as specified in Tab 3.
be expected to be present in quantities such as to require The second characteristic numeral indicates the vibration
special precautions for the construction, installation and level in which the electrical equipment operates satisfacto-
use of electrical apparatus. rily, as specified in Tab 4.
Note 1: An explosive gas atmosphere is a mixture with air, under
atmospheric conditions, of flammable substances in the form of 3.27.2 The tests for verifying the additional and supple-
gas, vapour or mist, in which, after ignition, combustion spreads mentary letters and the characteristic numeral of the envi-
throughout the unconsumed mixture. ronmental categories are defined in Ch 3, Sec 6.

22 Bureau Veritas April 2007

 Pt C, Ch 2, Sec 1

Table 2 : EC Code

Code letter First characteristic numeral Second characteristic numeral Additional letter Supplementary letter
EC (numerals 1 to 4) (numerals 1 to 3) (letter S) (1) (letter C) (2)
(1) The additional letter S indicates the resistance to salt mist (exposed decks, masts) of the electrical equipment.
(2) The supplementary letter C indicates the relative humidity up to 80% (air conditioned areas) in which the electrical equipment
operates satisfactorily.

Table 3 : First characteristic numeral

First characteristic numeral Brief description of location Temperature range, in °C

1 Air conditioned areas +5 + 40
2 Enclosed spaces +5 + 45
3 Inside consoles or close to combustion engines and similar +5 + 55
4 Exposed decks, masts − 25 + 45

Table 4 : Second characteristic numeral

Second Displacement
Frequency range, Acceleration
characteristic Brief description of location amplitude,
in Hz amplitude g
numeral in mm
1 Machinery spaces, command and control stations, from 2,0 to 13,2 1,0 −
accommodation spaces, exposed decks, cargo spaces
from 13,2 to 100 − 0,7
2 Masts from 2,0 to 13,2 3,0 −
from 13,2 to 50 − 2,1
3 On air compressors, on diesel engines and similar from 2,0 to 25,0 1,6 −
from 25,0 to 100 − 4,0

April 2007 Bureau Veritas 23

Pt C, Ch 2, Sec 2

SECTION 2 GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

1 Environmental conditions 1.4 Sea water temperatures

1.4.1 The temperatures shown in Tab 3 are applicable to
1.1 General ships classed for unrestricted service.
1.1.1 The electrical components of installations are to be
Table 3 : Water temperature
designed and constructed to operate satisfactorily under the
environmental conditions on board. Coolant Temperature range, in °C
In particular, the conditions shown in the tables in this Arti- Sea water 0 + 32
cle are to be taken into account.
Note 1: The environmental conditions are characterised by: 1.4.2 For ships classed for service in specific zones, the
• one set of variables including climatic conditions (e.g. ambient Society may accept different values for the sea water tem-
air temperature and humidity), conditions dependent upon perature (e.g. for ships operating outside the tropical belt,
chemically active substances (e.g. salt mist) or mechanically the maximum sea water temperature may be assumed as
active substances (e.g. dust or oil), mechanical conditions (e.g. equal to + 25°C instead of + 32°C).
vibrations or inclinations) and conditions dependent upon
electromagnetic noise and interference, and
1.5 Salt mist
• another set of variables dependent mainly upon location on
vessels, operational patterns and transient conditions. 1.5.1 The applicable salt mist content in the air is to be
1mg/m3.
1.2 Ambient air temperatures
1.6 Inclinations
1.2.1 For ships classed for unrestricted navigation, the
ambient air temperature ranges shown in Tab 1 are applica- 1.6.1 The inclinations applicable are those shown in Tab 4.
ble in relation to the various locations of installation.
The Society may consider deviations from these angles of
inclination taking into consideration the type, size and serv-
Table 1 : Ambient air temperature
ice conditions of the ships.

Location Temperature range, in °C 1.7 Vibrations

Enclosed spaces +5 + 45
1.7.1 In relation to the location of the electrical compo-
Inside consoles or fitted on com- +5 + 55 nents, the vibration levels given in Tab 5 are to be assumed.
bustion engines and similar
Air conditioned areas +5 + 40 1.7.2 The natural frequencies of the equipment, their sus-
pensions and their supports are to be outside the frequency
Exposed decks − 25 + 45 ranges specified.
Where this is not possible using a suitable constructional
1.2.2 For ships classed for service in specific zones, the
technique, the equipment vibrations are to be dumped so as
Society may accept different ranges for the ambient air tem-
to avoid unacceptable amplifications.
perature (e.g. for ships operating outside the tropical belt,
the maximum ambient air temperature may be assumed as
equal to + 40°C instead of + 45°C). 2 Quality of power supply

1.3 Humidity 2.1 General

1.3.1 For ships classed for unrestricted service, the humid- 2.1.1 All electrical components supplied from the main
ity ranges shown in Tab 2 are applicable in relation to the and emergency systems are to be so designed and manufac-
various locations of installation. tured that they are capable of operating satisfactorily under
the normally occuring variations in voltage and frequency
Table 2 : Humidity specified from [2.2] to [2.4].

Location Humidity 2.2 a.c. distribution systems

General 95% at 55°C
2.2.1 For alternating current components the voltage and
Air conditioned areas Different values may be considered frequency variations of power supply shown in Tab 6 are to
on a case by case basis be assumed.

24 Bureau Veritas April 2007

 Pt C, Ch 2, Sec 2

Table 4 : Inclination of ship

Angles of inclination, in degrees (1)

Type of machinery, equipment or component Athwartship Fore-and-aft
static dynamic (4) static dynamic (5)
Machinery and equipment relative to main electrical power installation 15 22,5 5 7,5
Machinery and equipment relative to the emergency power installation
and crew and passenger safety systems of the ship (e.g. emergency source 22,5 (2) 22,5 (2) 10 10
of power, emergency fire pumps, etc.)
Switchgear and associated electrical and electronic components and
22,5 22,5 10 10
remote control systems (3)
(1) Athwartship and fore-and-aft angles may occur simultaneously in their most unfavourable combination.
(2) In the case of gas carriers or chemical tankers, the emergency power supply must also remain operable with the ship flooded to
a final athwartship inclination up to a maximum of 30°.
(3) No undesired switching operations or functional changes may occur up to an angle of inclination of 45°.
(4) The period of dynamic inclination may be assumed equal to 10 s.
(5) The period of dynamic inclination may be assumed equal to 5 s.

Table 5 : Vibration levels

Frequency range, Displacement Acceleration

Location
in Hz amplitude, in mm amplitude g

Machinery spaces, command and control stations, accommodation from 2,0 to 13,2 1,0 −
spaces, exposed decks, cargo spaces from 13,2 to 100 − 0,7
from 2,0 to 25,0 1,6 −
On air compressors, on diesel engines and similar
from 25,0 to 100 − 4,0
from 2,0 to 13,2 3,0 −
Masts
from 13,2 to 50 − 2,1

2.3.2 For direct current components supplied by electrical

Table 6 : Voltage and frequency variations of battery the following voltage variations are to be assumed:
power supply in a.c.
• +30% to −25% for components connected to the bat-
Variations tery during charging (see Note 1)
Parameter
Continuous Transient • +20% to −25% for components not connected to the
Voltage + 6% − 10% ± 20% (recovery time: 1,5 s) battery during charging.
Frequency ± 5% ± 10% (recovery time: 5 s)
Note 1: Different voltage variations as determined by the charg-
Note 1: For alternating current components supplied by ing/discharging characteristics, including ripple voltage from the
emergency generating sets, different variations may be con- charging device, may be considered.
sidered.
2.3.3 Any special system, e.g. electronic circuits, whose
2.3 d.c. distribution systems function cannot operate satisfactorily within the limits
shown in the tables should not be supplied directly from the
2.3.1 For direct current components the power supply vari- system but by alternative means, e.g. through stabilized
ations shown in Tab 7 are to be assumed.
supply.

Table 7 : Voltage variations in d.c.

2.4 Harmonic distortions
Parameters Variations
2.4.1 For components intended for systems without sub-
Voltage tolerance (continuous) ± 10%
stantially static converter loads and supplied by synchro-
Voltage cyclic variation 5% nous generators, it is assumed that the total voltage
Voltage ripple (a.c. r.m.s. over steady d.c. 10% harmonic distortion does not exceed 5%, and the single
voltage) harmonic does not exceed 3% of the nominal voltage.

April 2007 Bureau Veritas 25

Pt C, Ch 2, Sec 2

2.4.2 For components intended for systems fed by static teristics may be verified by means of the test cited in IEC
converters, and/or systems in which the static converter Publication 60092-101 or in other recognised standards.
load predominates, it is assumed that:
• the single harmonics do not exceed 5% of the nominal 4.2 Insulating materials for windings
voltage up to the 15th harmonic of the nominal fre-
quency, decreasing to 1% at the 100th harmonic (see 4.2.1 Insulated windings are to be resistant to moisture, sea
Fig 1), and that air and oil vapour unless special precautions are taken to
protect insulants against such agents.
• the total harmonic distortion does not exceed 10%.
4.2.2 The insulation classes given in Tab 8 may be used in
Figure 1 : accordance with IEC Publication 60085.
10

5
Table 8 : Insulation Classes

Maximum continuous operating

Class
temperature, in °C
1
(%)

A 105
Uν

E 120
U

B 130
0,1
1 3 10 15 100
F 155
ν H 180

2.4.3 Higher values for the harmonic content (e.g. in elec- 4.3 Insulating materials for cables
tric propulsion plant systems) may be accepted on the basis
of correct operation of all electrical devices. 4.3.1 See Ch 2, Sec 9, [1.3].

3 Electromagnetic susceptibility 5 Construction

3.1 5.1 General

5.1.1 All electrical apparatus is to be so constructed as not

3.1.1 For electronic type components such as sensors,
to cause injury when handled or touched in the normal
alarm panels, automatic and remote control equipment,
manner.
protective devices and speed regulators, the conducted and
radiated disturbance levels to be assumed are those given in
5.1.2 The design of electrical equipment is to allow acces-
Part C, Chapter 3.
sibility to each part that needs inspection or adjustment,
Note 1: See also IEC Publication 60533 - “Electromagnetic Com- also taking into account its arrangement on board.
patibility of Electrical and Electronic Installations in Ships and of
Mobile and Fixed Offshore Units”. 5.1.3 Enclosures are to be of adequate mechanical strength
and rigidity.
4 Materials 5.1.4 Enclosures for electrical equipment are generally to
be of metal; other materials may be accepted for accesso-
4.1 General ries such as connection boxes, socket-outlets, switches and
luminaires. Other exemptions for enclosures or parts of
enclosures not made of metal will be specially considered
4.1.1 In general, and unless it is adequately protected, all
by the Society.
electrical equipment is to be constructed of durable, flame-
retardant, moisture-resistant materials which are not subject
5.1.5 Cable entrance are not to impair the degree of pro-
to deterioration in the atmosphere and at the temperatures
tection of the relevant enclosure (see Ch 2, Sec 3, Tab 2).
to which they are likely to be exposed. Particular considera-
tion is to be given to sea air and oil vapour contamination.
5.1.6 All nuts and screws used in connection with current-
Note 1: The flame-retardant and moisture-resistant characteristics carrying parts and working parts are to be effectively
may be verified by means of the tests cited in IEC Publication locked.
60092-101 or in other recognised standards.
5.1.7 All equipment is generally to be provided with suita-
4.1.2 Where the use of incombustible materials or lining ble, fixed terminal connectors in an accessible position for
with such materials is required, the incombustibility charac- convenient connection of the external cables.

26 Bureau Veritas April 2007

 Pt C, Ch 2, Sec 2

5.2 Degree of protection of enclosures • oil-immersed apparatus (only when required by the
application): Ex(o).
5.2.1 Electrical equipment is to be protected against the
ingress of foreign bodies and water.
6.1.3 Other equipment complying with types of protection
The minimum required degree of protection, in relation to
other than those in [6.1.2] may be considered by the Soci-
the place of installation, is generally that specified in Ch 2,
Sec 3, Tab 2. ety, such as:

5.2.2 The degrees of protection are to be in accordance • simple electrical apparatus and components (e.g. ther-
with: mocouples, photocells, strain gauges, junction boxes,
• IEC Publication No. 60529 for equipment in general switching devices), included in intrinsically-safe circuits
• IEC Publication No. 60034-5 for rotating machines. not capable of storing or generating electrical power or
energy in excess of limits stated in the relevant rules
5.2.3 For cable entries see [4.3.1].
• electrical apparatus specifically designed and certified
6 Protection against explosion hazard by the appropriate authority for use in Zone 0 or spe-
cially tested for Zone 2 (e.g. type “n” protection)
6.1 Protection against explosive gas or • equipment the type of which ensures the absence of
vapour atmosphere hazard sparks and arcs and of “hot spots” during its normal
6.1.1 Electrical equipment intended for use in areas where operation
explosive gas or vapour atmospheres may occur (e.g. oil
• pressurised equipment
tankers, liquefied gas carriers, chemical tankers, etc.), is to
be of a "safe type" suitable for the relevant flammable • equipment having an enclosure filled with a liquid die-
atmosphere and for shipboard use. lectric, or encapsulated.
6.1.2 The following “certified safe type” equipment is con-
sidered: 6.2 Protection against combustible dust
• intrinsically-safe: Ex(ia) - Ex(ib)
hazard
• flameproof: Ex(d)
• increased safety: Ex(e) 6.2.1 Electrical appliances intended for use in areas where
• pressurised enclosure: Ex(p) a combustible dust hazard may be present are to be
• encapsulated: Ex(m) arranged with enclosures having a degree of protection and
• sand filled: Ex(q) maximum surface temperature suitable for the dust to
• special protection: Ex(s) (apparatus not conforming with which they may be exposed.
IEC 60079 may be considered safe by a national or
other authorised body for use in potentially explosive Note 1: Where the characteristics of the dust are unknown, the
atmospheres. In such cases, the apparatus is identified appliances are to have a degree of protection IP6X. For most dusts a
with the symbol “s”) maximum surface temperature of 200°C is considered adequate.

April 2007 Bureau Veritas 27

Pt C, Ch 2, Sec 3

SECTION 3 SYSTEM DESIGN

1 Supply systems and characteristics 1.2.3 For high voltage systems see Ch 2, Sec 13.
of the supply
2 Sources of electrical power
1.1 Supply systems
2.1 General
1.1.1 The following distribution systems may be used:
a) on d.c. installations: 2.1.1 Electrical installations are to be such that:
• two-wire insulated a) All electrical auxiliary services necessary for maintaining
• two-wire with one pole earthed the ship in normal operational and habitable conditions
and for the preservation of the cargo will be assured
b) on a.c. installations: without recourse to the emergency source of electrical
• three-phase three-wire with neutral insulated power.
• three-phase three-wire with neutral directly earthed b) Electrical services essential for safety will be assured
or earthed through an impedance under various emergency conditions.
• three-phase four-wire with neutral directly earthed
c) When a.c. generators are involved, attention is to be
or earthed through an impedance given to the starting of squirrel-cage motors connected
• single-phase two-wire insulated to the system, particularly with regard to the effect of the
• single-phase two-wire with one phase earthed. magnitude and duration of the transient voltage change
produced due to the maximum starting current and the
1.1.2 Distribution systems other than those listed in [1.1.1] power factor. The voltage drop due to such starting cur-
(e.g. with hull return, three-phase four-wire insulated) will rent is not to cause any motor already operating to stall
be considered by the Society on a case by case basis. or have any adverse effect on other equipment in use.
1.1.3 The hull return system of distribution is not to be used
for power, heating or lighting in any ship of 1600 tons gross 2.2 Main source of electrical power
tonnage and upwards.
2.2.1 A main source of electrical power is to be provided,
1.1.4 The requirement of [1.1.3] does not preclude under of sufficient capability to supply all electrical auxiliary serv-
conditions approved by the Society the use of: ices necessary for maintaining the ship in normal opera-
tional and habitable conditions and for the preservation of
a) impressed current cathodic protective systems
the cargo without recourse to the emergency source of elec-
b) limited and locally earthed systems, or trical power.
c) insulation level monitoring devices provided the circu-
lation current does not exceed 30 mA under the most 2.2.2 For vessels propelled by electrical power and having
unfavourable conditions. two or more constant voltage propulsion generating sets
Note 1: Limited and locally earthed systems such as starting and
which constitute the source of electrical energy for the
ignition systems of internal combustion engines are accepted pro- ship’s auxiliary services, see Ch 2, Sec 14.
vided that any possible resulting current does not flow directly
through any dangerous spaces. 2.2.3 The main source of electrical power is to consist of at
least two generating sets.
1.1.5 For the supply systems of ships carrying liquid devel- The capacity of these generating sets is to be such that in the
oping combustible gases or vapours, see Pt D, Ch 7, Sec 5, event of any one generating set being stopped it will still be
Pt D, Ch 8, Sec 10 or Pt D, Ch 9, Sec 10. possible to supply those services necessary to provide:
1.1.6 For the supply systems in HV Installations, see Ch 2, a) normal operational conditions of propulsion and safety
Sec 13. (see [2.2.4])
b) minimum comfortable conditions of habitability (see Ch 2,
1.2 Maximum voltages Sec 1, [3.4.2])
c) preservation of the cargo, i. e. all the equipment which
1.2.1 The maximum voltages for both alternating current
are needed for refrigerated cargo or operation of any
and direct current low-voltage systems of supply for the
safety device, such as inert gas generator.
ship’s services are given in Tab 1.
Such capacity is, in addition, to be sufficient to start the
1.2.2 Voltages exceeding those shown will be specially largest motor without causing any other motor to stop or
considered in the case of specific systems. having any adverse effect on other equipment in operation.

28 Bureau Veritas April 2007

 Pt C, Ch 2, Sec 3

Table 1 : Maximum voltages for various ship services

Use Maximum voltage V

For permanently installed and Power equipment 1000
connected to fixed wiring
Heating equipment (except in accommodation spaces) 500
Cooking equipment 500
Lighting 250
Space heaters in accommodation spaces 250
Control (1), communication (including signal lamps) and instrumentation 250
equipment
For permanently installed and Power and heating equipment, where such connection is necessary because 1000
connected by flexible cable of the application (e.g. for moveable cranes or other hoisting gear)
For socket-outlets supplying Portable appliances which are not hand-held during operation 1000
(e.g. refrigerated containers) by flexible cables
Portable appliances and other consumers by flexible cables 250
Equipment requiring extra precaution against electric shock where a 250
isolating transformer is used to supply one appliance (2)
Equipment requiring extra precaution against electric shock with or without 50
a safety transformer (2)
(1) For control equipment which is part of a power and heating installation (e.g. pressure or temperature switches for start/stop
motors), the same maximum voltage as allowed for the power and heating equipment may be used provided that all compo-
nents are constructed for such voltage. However, the control voltage to external equipment is not to exceed 500 V.
(2) Both conductors in such systems are to be insulated from earth.

2.2.4 Those services necessary to provide normal opera- in operation to permit propulsion and steering and to
tional conditions of propulsion and safety include primary ensure safety.
and secondary essential services.
For the purpose of calculating the capacity necessary for 2.2.8 Where the electrical power is normally supplied by
such services, it is essential to consider which of them can one generator, provision shall be made, upon loss of power,
be expected to be in use simultaneously. for automatic starting and connecting to the main switch-
board of stand-by generator(s) of sufficient capacity with
For a duplicated service, one being supplied electrically automatic restarting of the essential auxiliaries, in sequen-
and the other non-electrically (e.g. driven by the main tial operation if required. Starting and connection to the
engine), the electrical capacity is not included in the above main switchboard of the stand-by generator is to be prefera-
calculation. bly within 30 seconds, but in any case not more than 45
2.2.5 The services in [2.2.4] do not include: seconds after loss of power.
• thrusters not forming part of the main propulsion Where prime movers with longer starting time are used, this
(except in manoeuvring conditions) starting and connection time may be exceeded upon
approval from the Society.
• cargo handling gear
• cargo pumps 2.2.9 Load shedding or other equivalent arrangements
• refrigerators for air conditioning. should be provided to protect the generators required in the
present Article against sustained overload.
2.2.6 Further to the provisions above, the generating sets
The load shedding should be automatic.
shall be such as to ensure that with any one generator or its
primary source of power out of operation, the remaining The non-essential services, services for habitability and, if
generating sets shall be capable of providing the electrical necessary, the secondary essential services may be shed in
services necessary to start the main propulsion plant from a order to make sure that the connected generator set(s) is/are
"dead ship" condition. not overloaded.

2.2.7 Where the electrical power is normally supplied by 2.2.10 The emergency source of electrical power may be
more than one generator set simultaneously in parallel used for the purpose of starting from a "dead ship" condi-
operation, provision of protection, including automatic dis- tion if its capability either alone or combined with that of
connection of sufficient non-essential services and, if neces- any other source of electrical power is sufficient to provide
sary, secondary essential services and those provided for at the same time those services required to be supplied in
habitability, should be made to ensure that, in case of loss accordance with the provisions of [3.6.3], items a), b), c)
of any of these generating sets, the remaining ones are kept and d), or Pt D, Ch 11, Sec 5 for passenger ships.

April 2007 Bureau Veritas 29

Pt C, Ch 2, Sec 3

2.2.11 The arrangement of the ship’s main source of electri- former not in operation, the remaining transformer(s) is (are)
cal power shall be such that essential services can be main- sufficient to ensure the supply to the services stated in
tained regardless of the speed and direction of rotation of [2.2.3].
the main propulsion machinery or shafting. Each transformer required is to be located as a separate unit
with separate enclosure or equivalent, and is to be served
2.2.12 Generators driven by the propulsion plant (shaft
by separate circuits on the primary and secondary sides.
generators) which are intended to operate at constant speed
Each of the primary and secondary circuits is to be provided
(e.g. a system where vessel speed and direction are control-
with switchgears and protection devices in each phase.
led by varying propeller pitch) may be accepted as forming
part of the main source of electrical power if, in all sailing Suitable interlocks or a warning label are to be provided in
and manoeuvring conditions including the propeller being order to prevent maintenance or repair of one single-phase
stopped, the capacity of these generators is sufficient to pro- transformer unless both switchgears are opened on their pri-
vide the electrical power to comply with [2.2.3] and all fur- mary and secondary sides.
ther requirements, especially those of [2.2.6]. They are to
be not less effective and reliable than the independent gen- 2.2.15 For ships intended for operation with periodically
erating sets. unattended machinery spaces, see Part E, Chapter 3.

2.2.13 Shaft generator installations which do not comply 2.2.16 For starting arrangements for main generating sets,
with the provisions of [2.2.12] may be used as additional see Ch 1, Sec 2, [3.1].
sources of electrical power with respect to the power bal-
2.2.17 Where single phase transformers are used, only one
ance provided that:
spare element is required if special precautions are taken to
a) in the event of a loss of power from the shaft genera- rapidly replace the faulty one.
tor(s), e.g. due to a sudden stopping of the propulsion
plant, a standby generating set is started automatically 2.2.18 Generators and generator systems, having the ship
b) the capacity of the standby set is sufficient for the loads propulsion machinery as their prime mover but not forming
necessary for propulsion and safety of the vessel part of the ship main source of electrical power, may be
used whilst the ship is at sea to supply electrical services
c) the time required to restore these services is not longer required for normal operational and habitable conditions
than 45 s. provided that:
2.2.14 Where transformers, converters or similar appli- a) there are sufficient and adequately rated additional gen-
ances constitute an essential part of the electrical supply erators fitted, which constitute the main source of elec-
system, the system is to be so arranged as to ensure the trical power required by [2.2.1]
same continuity of supply as stated in this sub-article. b) arrangements are fitted to automatically start one or
This may be achieved by arranging at least two three-phase or more of the generators, constituting the main source of
three single-phase transformers supplied, protected and electrical power required by [2.2.1], upon the frequency
installed as indicated in Fig 1, so that with any one trans- variations exceeding ± 10% of the limits specified below

Figure 1 :
Three-phase transformers Single-phase transformers

R R
'P' S 'P' S
T T

enclosure or separation

R R
S S
T T

30 Bureau Veritas April 2007

 Pt C, Ch 2, Sec 3

c) within the declared operating range of the generators 2.3.7 If the services which are to be supplied by the transi-
and/or generator systems the specified limits for the volt- tional source receive power from an accumulator battery by
age variations and the frequency variations in Ch 2, Sec means of semiconductor convertors, means are to be pro-
2 can be met vided for supplying such services also in the event of failure
d) the short circuit current of the generator and/or genera- of the convertor (e.g. providing a bypass feeder or a dupli-
tor system is sufficient to trip the generator/generator cation of convertor).
system circuit-breaker taking into account the selectivity
2.3.8 Where electrical power is necessary to restore propul-
of the protective devices for the distribution system
sion, the capacity of the emergency source shall be suffi-
e) where considered appropriate, load shedding arrange- cient to restore propulsion to the ship in conjunction to
ments are to be fitted other machinery as appropriate, from a dead ship condition
f) on ships having remote control of the ship's propulsion within 30 min. after blackout.
machinery from the navigating bridge, means are provided, For the purpose of this requirement only, the dead ship con-
or procedures be in place, so as to ensure that supplies to dition and blackout are both understood to mean a condi-
essential services are maintained during manoeuvring con- tion under which the main propulsion plant, boilers and
ditions in order to avoid a blackout situation. auxiliaries are not in operation and in restoring the propul-
sion, no stored energy for starting the propulsion plant, the
2.3 Emergency source of electrical power main source of electrical power and other essential auxilia-
ries is to be assumed available. It is assumed that means are
2.3.1 A self-contained emergency source of electrical available to start the emergency generator at all times.
power shall be provided. The emergency generator and other means needed to
restore the propulsion are to have a capacity such that the
2.3.2 Provided that suitable measures are taken for safe- necessary propulsion starting energy is available within 30
guarding independent emergency operation under all cir- minutes of blackout/dead ship condition as defined above.
cumstances, the emergency generator may be used, Emergency generator stored starting energy is not to be
exceptionally, and for short periods, to supply non-emer- directly used for starting the propulsion plant, the main
gency circuits. source of electrical power and/or other essential auxiliaries
Exceptionally is understood to mean conditions, while the (emergency generator excluded).
vessel is at sea, such as: For steam ships, the 30 minute time limit given in SOLAS
a) blackout situation can be interpreted as time from blackout/dead ship condi-
b) dead ship situation tion defined above to light-off the first boiler.

c) routine use for testing 2.3.9 Where the emergency source of power is necessary
d) short-term parallel operation with the main source of to restore the main source of electrical power, provisions
electrical power for the purpose of load transfer. are to be made to allow a manual restart of a main generat-
ing set in case of failure of the emergency source.
Unless otherwise instructed by the Society, the emergency
generator may be used during lay time in port for the supply 2.3.10 Provision shall be made for the periodic testing of
of the ship mains, provided the requirements of [2.4] are the complete emergency system and shall include the test-
complied with. ing of automatic starting arrangements, where provided.

2.3.3 The electrical power available shall be sufficient to 2.3.11 For starting arrangements for emergency generating
supply all those services that are essential for safety in an sets, see Ch 1, Sec 2, [3.1].
emergency, due regard being paid to such services as may
have to be operated simultaneously. 2.3.12 The emergency source of electrical power may be
either a generator or an accumulator battery which shall
2.3.4 The emergency source of electrical power shall be comply with the requirements of [2.3.13] or [2.3.15],
capable, having regard to starting currents and the transi- respectively.
tory nature of certain loads, of supplying simultaneously at
least the services stated in [3.6.3] for the period specified, if 2.3.13 Where the emergency source of electrical power is a
they depend upon an electrical source for their operation. generator, it shall be:
a) driven by a suitable prime mover with an independent
2.3.5 The transitional source of emergency electrical
supply of fuel, having a flashpoint (closed cup test) of
power, where required, is to be of sufficient capacity to sup-
not less than 43°C
ply at least the services stated in [3.6.7] for half an hour, if
they depend upon an electrical source for their operation. b) started automatically upon failure of the main source of
electrical power supply to the emergency switchboard
2.3.6 An indicator shall be mounted in a suitable place on unless a transitional source of emergency electrical power
the main switchboard or in the machinery control room to in accordance with c) below is provided where the emer-
indicate when the batteries constituting either the emer- gency generator is automatically started, it shall be auto-
gency source of electrical power or the transitional source matically connected to the emergency switchboard those
of emergency electrical power referred to in [2.3.15] and services referred to in [3.6.7] shall then be connected
[2.3.16] are being discharged. automatically to the emergency generator, and

April 2007 Bureau Veritas 31

Pt C, Ch 2, Sec 3

c) provided with a transitional source of emergency electri- 2.4 Use of emergency generator in port
cal power as specified in [2.3.16] unless an emergency
generator is provided capable both of supplying the 2.4.1 To prevent the generator or its prime mover from
services mentioned in that paragraph and of being auto- becoming overloaded when used in port, arrangements are
matically started and supplying the required load as to be provided to shed sufficient non-emergency loads to
quickly as is safe and practicable subject to a maximum ensure its continued safe operation.
of 45 s.
2.4.2 The prime mover is to be arranged with fuel oil filters
2.3.14 It is accepted to apply the total consumer load in and lubrication oil filters, monitoring equipment and pro-
steps providing that: tection devices as requested for the prime mover for main
• the total load is supplied within 45 seconds since power power generation and for unattended operation.
failure on the main switchboard
2.4.3 The fuel oil supply tank to the prime mover is to be
• the power distribution system is designed such that the provided with a low level alarm, arranged at a level ensur-
declared maximum step loading is not exceeded ing sufficient fuel oil capacity for the emergency services for
the period of time as required in [3.6].
• the compliance of time delays and loading sequence
with the above is demonstrated at ship’s trials.
2.4.4 The prime mover is to be designed and built for con-
2.3.15 Where the emergency source of electrical power is tinuous operation and should be subjected to a planned
an accumulator battery it shall be capable of: maintenance scheme ensuring that it is always available
and capable of fulfilling its role in the event of an emer-
a) carrying the emergency electrical load without recharg- gency at sea.
ing while maintaining the voltage of the battery through-
out the discharge period within 12% above or below its 2.4.5 Fire detectors are to be installed in the location where
nominal voltage the emergency generator set and emergency switchboard
b) automatically connecting to the emergency switchboard are installed.
in the event of failure of the main source of electrical
power, and 2.4.6 Means are to be provided to readily change over to
emergency operation.
c) immediately supplying at least those services specified
in [3.6.7]. 2.4.7 Control, monitoring and supply circuits for the pur-
pose of the use of the emergency generator in port are to be
2.3.16 The transitional source of emergency electrical
so arranged and protected that any electrical fault will not
power where required by [2.3.13] item c), shall consist of
influence the operation of the main and emergency services.
an accumulator battery which shall operate without
recharging while maintaining the voltage of the battery When necessary for safe operation, the emergency switch-
throughout the discharge period within 12% above or board is to be fitted with switches to isolate the circuits.
below its nominal voltage and be so arranged as to supply
automatically in the event of failure of either the main or the 2.4.8 Instructions are to be provided on board to ensure
emergency source of electrical power for half an hour at that, even when the vessel is underway, all control devices
least the services in [3.6.7] if they depend upon an electrical (e.g. valves, switches) are in a correct position for the inde-
source for their operation. pendent emergency operation of the emergency generator
set and emergency switchboard.
2.3.17 Where the emergency and/or transitional source of These instructions are also to contain information on the
power is an uninterruptible power system (UPS), it is to required fuel oil tank level, position of harbour/sea mode
comply with the requirement of Ch 2, Sec 6, [2]. switch, if fitted, ventilation openings, etc.
2.3.18 Where the emergency and/or transitional emer-
gency loads are supplied from a battery via an electronic 3 Distribution
converter or inverter, the maximum permitted d.c. voltage
variations are to be taken as those on the load side of the 3.1 Earthed distribution systems
converter or inverter.
Where the d.c. is converted into a.c. the maximum varia- 3.1.1 System earthing is to be effected by means independ-
tions are not exceed those given in Ch 2, Sec 2, Tab 6. ent of any earthing arrangements of the non-current-carry-
ing parts.
2.3.19 If the emergency generator is fitted with control,
alarm and safety systems based on electronic equipment, 3.1.2 Means of disconnection are to be fitted in the neutral
these systems are to be so arranged that, when in failure, earthing connection of each generator so that the generator
there is still a possibility to operate the emergency generator may be disconnected for maintenance or insulation resist-
manually. ance measurements.
A failure of the electronic governor is not considered.
3.1.3 Generator neutrals may be connected in common,
2.3.20 For the emergency source of electrical power in pas- provided that the third harmonic content of the voltage
senger ships, see Pt D, Ch 11, Sec 5. wave form of each generator does not exceed 5%.

32 Bureau Veritas April 2007

 Pt C, Ch 2, Sec 3

3.1.4 Where a switchboard is split into sections operated 3.5 Main distribution of electrical power
independently or where there are separate switchboards, neu-
tral earthing is to be provided for each section or for each 3.5.1 Where the main source of electrical power is neces-
switchboard. Means are to be provided to ensure that the sary for propulsion of the ship, the main busbar is to be
earth connection is not removed when generators are isolated. divided into at least two parts which are normally to be
connected by circuit breakers or other approved means
3.1.5 Where for final sub-circuits it is necessary to locally such as circuit breakers without tripping mechanisms or dis-
connect a pole (or phase) of the sub-circuits to earth after connecting links or switches by means of which busbars
the protective devices (e.g. in automation systems or to can be split safely and easily.
avoid electromagnetic disturbances), provision (e.g. d.c./d.c.
convertors or transformers) is to be made such that current Bolted links, for example bolted bus bar sections, are not
unbalances do not occur in the individual poles or phases. accepted.

The connection of generating sets and associated auxiliaries

3.1.6 For high voltage systems see Ch 2, Sec 13. and other duplicated equipment is to be equally divided
between the parts as far as practicable, so that in the event
of damage to one section of the switchboard the remaining
3.2 Insulated distribution systems
parts are still supplied.

3.2.1 Every insulated distribution system, whether primary

3.5.2 Two or more units serving the same consumer (e.g.
or secondary (see Note 1), for power, heating or lighting,
main and standby lubricating oil pumps) are to be supplied
shall be provided with a device capable of continuously
by individual separate circuits without the use of common
monitoring the insulation level to earth (i.e. the values of feeders, protective devices or control circuits.
electrical insulation to earth) and of giving an audible and
visual indication of abnormally low insulation values (see This requirement is satisfied when such units are supplied
Ch 2, Sec 15). by separate cables from the main switchboard or from two
independent section boards.
Note 1: A primary system is one supplied directly by generators.
Secondary systems are those supplied by transformers or convertors.
3.5.3 A main electric lighting system which shall provide
illumination throughout those parts of the ship normally
3.2.2 For high voltage systems see Ch 2, Sec 13.
accessible to and used by (passengers or) crew shall be sup-
plied from the main source of electrical power.
3.3 Distribution systems with hull return
3.6 Emergency distribution of electrical
3.3.1 Where the hull return system is used, if permitted, all power
final sub-circuits, i.e. all circuits fitted after the last protec-
tive device, shall be two-wire.
3.6.1 The emergency switchboard shall be supplied during
The hull return is to be achieved by connecting to the hull normal operation from the main switchboard by an inter-
one of the busbars of the distribution board from which the connector feeder which shall be adequately protected at
final sub-circuits originate. the main switchboard against overload and short-circuit and
which is to be disconnected automatically at the emergency
switchboard upon failure of the main source of electrical
3.4 General requirements for distribution power.
systems
Where the system is arranged for feedback operation, the
interconnector feeder is also to be protected at the emer-
3.4.1 The distribution system is to be such that the failure of gency switchboard at least against short-circuit.
any single circuit will not endanger or impair primary
essential services and will not render secondary essential
3.6.2 In order to ensure ready availability of the emergency
services inoperative for longer periods.
source of electrical power, arrangements shall be made
where necessary to disconnect automatically non-emer-
3.4.2 No common switchgear (e.g. contactors for emer- gency circuits from the emergency switchboard to ensure
gency stop) is to be used between the switchboard’s busbars that power shall be available to the emergency circuits.
and two primary non duplicated essential services.
3.6.3 The emergency source of electrical power shall be
3.4.3 Where the main source of electrical power is neces- capable of supplying simultaneously at least the following
sary for propulsion and steering of the ship, the system shall services for the periods specified hereafter, if they depend
be so arranged that the electrical supply to equipment nec- upon an electrical source for their operation:
essary for propulsion and steering and to ensure safety of
the ship will be maintained or immediately restored in the a) for a period of 3 hours, emergency lighting at every
case of loss of any one of the generators in service. muster and embarkation station and over the sides

April 2007 Bureau Veritas 33

Pt C, Ch 2, Sec 3

b) for a period of 18 hours, emergency lighting: c) the public address system.

1) in all service and accommodation alleyways, stair-
3.6.5 Internal signals required in an emergency generally
ways and exits, personnel lift cars and personnel lift
include:
trunks
a) general alarm
2) in the machinery spaces and main generating sta-
tions including their control positions b) watertight door indication.

3) in all control stations, machinery control rooms, and 3.6.6 In a ship engaged regularly in voyages of short dura-
at each main and emergency switchboard tion, i.e. voyages where the route is no greater than 20 nau-
4) at all stowage positions for firemen’s outfits tical miles offshore or where the vessel has a class notation
"Coastal Navigation", the Society may, if satisfied that an
5) at the steering gear, and
adequate standard of safety would be attained, accept a
6) at the fire pump referred to in e) below, at the sprin- lesser period than the 18-hour period specified in [3.6.3],
kler pump, if any, at the emergency bilge pump, if items b) to e), but not less than 12 hours.
any, and at the starting positions of their motors Note 1: In ships for which Solas is not applicable, a reduced period
c) for a period of 18 hours: of time may be accepted.
Note 2: For passenger ships see Pt D, Ch 11, Sec 5.
1) the navigation lights and other lights required by the
International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at 3.6.7 The transitional source of emergency electrical
Sea in force power, where required, shall supply for half an hour at least
2) on ships constructed on or after 1 February 1995 the the following services if they depend upon an electrical
VHF radio installation required by Regulation source for their operation:
IV/7.1.1 and IV/7.1.2 of SOLAS Consolidated Edi- a) the lighting required by [3.6.3], items a), b) and c) 1) for
tion 1992, and, if applicable: this transitional phase, the required emergency electric
• the MF radio installation required by Regulations lighting, in respect of the machinery space and the
IV/9.1.1, IV/9.1.2, IV/10.1.2 and IV/10.1.3 accommodation and service spaces may be provided by
• the ship earth station required by Regulation permanently fixed, individual, automatically charged,
IV/10.1.1, and relay operated accumulator lamps, and
• the MF/HF radio installation required by Regula- b) all services required by [3.6.3], items d) 1), d) 3) and
tions IV/10.2.1, IV/10.2.2 and IV/11.1 d) 4), unless such services have an independent supply
for the period specified from an accumulator battery
d) for a period of 18 hours:
suitably located for use in an emergency.
1) all internal communication equipment as required in
an emergency [3.6.4] 3.7 Shore supply
2) the shipborne navigational equipment as required by
Regulation V/12 where such provision is unreasonable 3.7.1 Where arrangements are made for supplying the
or impracticable the Society may waive this require- electrical installation from a source on shore or elsewhere,
ment for ships of less than 5 000 tons gross tonnage a suitable connection box is to be installed on the ship in a
convenient location to receive the flexible cable from the
3) the fire detection and fire alarm systems, and
external source.
4) intermittent operation of the daylight signalling
lamp, the ship’s whistle, the manually operated call 3.7.2 Permanently fixed cables of adequate rating are to be
points and all internal signals (see [3.6.5]) that are provided for connecting the box to the main switchboard.
required in an emergency unless such services have
an independent supply for the period of 18 hours 3.7.3 Where necessary for systems with earthed neutrals,
from an accumulator battery suitably located for use the box is to be provided with an earthed terminal for con-
in an emergency nection between the shore’s and ship’s neutrals or for con-
nection of a protective conductor.
e) for a period of 18 hours: one of the fire pumps required
by the relevant provisions of Part C, Chapter 4, if 3.7.4 The connection box is to contain a circuit-breaker or
dependent upon the emergency generator for its source a switch-disconnector and fuses.
of power The shore connection is to be protected against short-circuit
f) for the period of time required in Ch 1, Sec 11, [2], the and overload however, the overload protection may be
steering gear where it is required to be so supplied. omitted in the connection box if provided on the main
switchboard.
3.6.4 Internal communication equipment required in an
emergency generally includes: 3.7.5 Means are to be provided for checking the phase
sequence of the incoming supply in relation to the ship’s
a) the means of communication between the navigating
system.
bridge and the steering gear compartment
b) the means of communication between the navigating 3.7.6 The cable connection to the box is to be provided
bridge and the position in the machinery space or control with at least one switch-disconnector on the main switch-
room from which the engines are normally controlled board.

34 Bureau Veritas April 2007

 Pt C, Ch 2, Sec 3

3.7.7 The shore connection is to be provided with an indi- • pumps discharging overboard above the lightest water
cator at the main switchboard in order to show when the line and in way of the area of lifeboat and liferaft
cable is energised. launching: Ch 1, Sec 10, [5.2.4].

3.7.8 At the connection box a notice is to be provided giv- 3.9.2 All power circuits terminating in a bunker or cargo
ing full information on the nominal voltage and frequency space are to be provided with a multiple-pole switch out-
of the installation. side the space for disconnecting such circuits.

3.7.9 The switch-disconnector on the main switchboard is 3.9.3 Thermal containers

to be interlocked with the main generator circuit-breakers Where the ship is intended to carry a large number of refrig-
in order to prevent its closure when any generator is supply- erated containers, provision of suitable means for prevent-
ing the main switchboard. ing earth faults on containers from affecting the main
distribution system is to be made.
3.7.10 Adequate means are to be provided to equalise the
potential between the hull and the shore when the electri-
3.10 Power supply to heaters
cal installation of the ship is supplied from shore.
3.10.1 Each heater rated more than 16 A is to be connected
3.8 Supply of motors to a separate final circuit.

3.8.1 A separate final sub-circuit is to be provided for every

3.11 Power supply to final sub-circuits:
motor required for an essential service (and for every motor
rated at 1 kW or more).
socket outlet and lighting

3.11.1 Final sub-circuits for lighting supplying more than

3.8.2 Each motor is to be provided with controlgear ensur-
one lighting point and for socket-outlets are to be fitted with
ing its satisfactory starting.
protective devices having a current rating not exceeding
Direct on line starters are accepted if the voltage drop does 16 A.
not exceed 15% of the network voltage.
3.11.2 In spaces such as:
3.8.3 Efficient means are to be provided for the isolation of
• main and large machinery spaces
the motor and its associated control gear from all live poles
of the supply. • large galleys
Where the control gear is mounted on or adjacent to a • passageways
switchboard, a disconnecting switch in the switchboard • stairways leading to boat-decks
may be used for this purpose. • public spaces
Otherwise, a disconnecting switch within the control gear
there is to be more than one final sub-circuit for lighting
enclosure or a separate enclosed disconnecting switch is to
such that failure of any one circuit does not reduce the
be provided.
lighting to an insufficient level.
3.8.4 Where the starter or any other apparatus for discon-
3.11.3 Where the emergency installation is required, one
necting the motor is remote from the motor itself, one of the
of the circuits in [3.11.1] may be supplied from the emer-
following is to be arranged:
gency source of power.
a) provision for locking the circuit disconnecting switch in
the OFF position 3.11.4 All lighting circuits terminating in a bunker or cargo
space are to be provided with a multiple-pole switch out-
b) an additional disconnecting switch fitted near the motor
side the space for disconnecting such circuits.
c) provision such that the fuses in each live pole or phase
can be readily removed and retained by persons author- 3.11.5 The number of lighting points (lamps) supplied by a
ised to have access to the motor. final sub-circuit having a current rating not exceeding 16 A
is not to exceed the following maxima:
3.9 Specific requirements for special power • 10 lamps for voltage up to 55 V
services • 14 lamps for voltage from 56 V up to 120 V
• 24 lamps for voltage from 121 V to 250 V.
3.9.1 For the supply and characteristics of the distribution
of the following services see the requirements listed: 3.11.6 Final sub-circuits for lighting in accomodation
• steering gear: Ch 1, Sec 11, [2] spaces may include socket-outlets. In that case, each
socket-outlet counts for two lighting points.
• fire-extinguishing and detecting systems: Ch 4, Sec 3
and Ch 4, Sec 6
3.12 Navigation lights
• permanently installed submersible bilge pump: Ch 1,
Sec 10, [6.7.7] 3.12.1 Navigation lights are to be connected separately to
• ventilation fans, fuel pumps: Ch 4, Sec 2, [2.1] a distribution board specially reserved for this purpose.

April 2007 Bureau Veritas 35

Pt C, Ch 2, Sec 3

3.12.2 The distribution board in [3.12.1] is to be supplied 3.13.6 The system is to be capable of operation from the
from two alternative circuits, one from the main source of navigation bridge and, except for the ship’s whistle, also
power and one from the emergency source of power (see from other strategic points.
also [3.6]).
Note 1: Other strategic points are taken to mean those locations,
The transfer of supply is to be practicable from the bridge, other than the navigation bridge, from where emergency situations
are intended to be controlled and the general alarm system can be
for example by means of a switch.
activated. A fire control station or a cargo control station should
normally be regarded as strategic points.
3.12.3 Each navigation light is to be controlled and pro-
tected in each insulated pole by a double-pole switch and a 3.13.7 The alarm is to continue to function after it has been
fuse or, alternatively, by a double-pole circuit-breaker, fitted triggered until it is manually turned off or is temporarily
on the distribution board referred to in [3.12.1]. interrupted by a message on the public address system.

3.12.4 Where there are double navigation lights, i.e. lights 3.13.8 The alarm system is to be audible throughout all the
with two lamps or where for every navigation light a spare accommodation and normal crew working spaces.
is also fitted, the connections to such lights may run in a
single cable provided that means are foreseen in the distri- 3.13.9 The minimum sound pressure level for the emer-
bution board to ensure that only one lamp or light may be gency alarm tone in interior and exterior spaces is to be 80
supplied at any one time. dB (A) and at least 10 dB (A) above ambient noise levels
occurring during normal equipment operation with the ship
3.12.5 Each navigation light is to be provided with an auto- underway in moderate weather.
matic indicator giving audible and/or visual warning in the
event of failure of the light. If an audible device alone is fit- 3.13.10 In cabins without a loudspeaker installation, an
ted, it is to be connected to a separate source of supply from electronic alarm transducer, e.g. a buzzer or similar, is to be
that of the navigation lights, for example an accumulator installed.
(storage) battery.
3.13.11 The sound pressure level at the sleeping position in
If a visual signal is used connected in series with the naviga- cabins and in cabin bathrooms is to be at least 75 dB (A)
tion light, means are to be provided to prevent the extinc- and at least 10 dB (A) above ambient noise levels.
tion of the navigation light due to the failure of the visual
signal. 3.13.12 For cables used for the general emergency alarm
system, see [9.6.2].
A minimum level of visibility is to be assured in the case of
use of dimmer devices.
3.14 Public address system
3.13 General emergency alarm system 3.14.1 The public address system is to be a loudspeaker
installation enabling the broadcast of messages into all
3.13.1 An electrically operated bell or klaxon or other spaces where people on board are normally present.
equivalent warning system installed in addition to the ship's
In spaces such as under deck passageways, bosun’s locker,
whistle or siren, for sounding the general emergency alarm
hospital and pump rooms, the public address system is/may
signal, is to comply with the requirements of this sub-article.
not be required.

3.13.2 The general emergency alarm system is to be sup- 3.14.2 Where the public address system is used to supple-
plemented by either a public address system complying ment the general emergency alarm system as per [3.13.2], it
with the requirements in [3.14] or other suitable means of is to be continuously powered from the emergency source
communication. of electrical power required by [2.3] and [3.6].

3.13.3 Entertainment sound system is to be automatically 3.14.3 The system is to allow for the broadcast of messages
turned off when the general alarm system is activated. from the navigation bridge and from other places on board
the ship as deemed necessary.
3.13.4 The system is to be continuously powered and is to
have an automatic change-over to a standby power supply 3.14.4 The system is to be protected against unauthorised
in case of loss of normal power supply. use.

An alarm is to be given in the event of failure of the normal 3.14.5 The system is to be installed with regard to acousti-
power supply. cally marginal conditions and not require any action from
the addressee.
3.13.5 The system is to be powered by means of two cir-
cuits, one from the ship's main supply and the other from 3.14.6 Where an individual loudspeaker has a device for
the emergency source of electrical power required by [2.3] local silencing, an override arrangement from the control
and [3.6]. station(s), including the navigating bridge, is to be in place.

36 Bureau Veritas April 2007

 Pt C, Ch 2, Sec 3

3.14.7 With the ship underway in normal conditions, the 3.17.2 Where more than one main propulsion engine is
minimum sound pressure level for broadcasting emergency foreseen, each speed control system is to be provided with
announcements is to be: an individual supply by means of separate wiring from the
a) in interior spaces, 75 dB (A) and at least 20 dB (A) above main switchboard or from two independent section boards.
the speech interference level Where the main busbars are divided into two sections, the
b) in exterior spaces, 80 dB (A) and at least 15 dB (A) governors are, as far as practicable, to be supplied equally
above the speech interference level. from the two sections.
With respect to cabin/state rooms, the sound pressure level
is to be attained as required inside such spaces during sea 3.17.3 In the case of propulsion engines which do not
trials. depend for their operation on electrical power, i.e. pumps
driven from the main engine, the speed control systems are
3.15 Combined general emergency alarm- to be fed both from the main source of electrical power and
public address system from an accumulator battery for at least 15 minutes or from
a similar supply source.
3.15.1 Where the public address system is the only means
Such battery may also be used for other services such as
for sounding the general emergency alarm signal and the
automation systems, where foreseen.
fire alarm, in addition to the requirements of [3.13] and
[3.14], the following are to be satisfied:
• the system automatically overrides any other non emer- 3.18 Power supply to the speed control sys-
gency input system when an emergency alarm is tems of generator sets
required
• the system automatically overrides any volume control 3.18.1 Each electrically operated control and/or speed con-
provided to give the required output for the emergency trol system of generator sets is to be provided with a sepa-
mode when an emergency alarm is required rate supply from the main source of electric power and from
• the system is arranged to prevent feedback or other an accumulator battery for at least 15 minutes or from a
interference similar supply source.
• the system is arranged to minimise the effect of a single
failure so that the alarm signal is still audible (above 3.18.2 The speed control system of generator sets is to be
ambient noise levels) also in the case of failure of any supplied from the main switchboard or from independent
one circuit or component, by means of the use of: section boards.
- multiple amplifiers Where the main busbars are divided into two sections, the
- segregated cable routes to public rooms, alleyways, governors are, as far as practicable, to be supplied from the
stairways and control stations sections to which the relevant generators are connected.
- more than one device for generating electronic
sound signal
3.19 Installation of water-based local application
- electrical protection for individual loudspeakers
fire-fighting systems (FWBLAFFS)
against short-circuits.

3.19.1 The system is to be capable of manual release.

3.16 Control and indication circuits
3.16.1 For the supply of automation systems, comprising 3.19.2 The activation of the fire-fighting system is not to
control, alarm and safety system, see the requirements of result in loss of electrical power or reduction of the
Part C, Chapter 3. manoeuvrability of the ship.

3.16.2 Control and indicating circuits relative to primary 3.19.3 The system and its components are to be designed
essential services are to be branched off from the main cir- to withstand ambient temperature changes, vibration,
cuit in which the relevant equipment is installed. Equivalent humidity, shock, impact, clogging and corrosion normally
arrangements may be accepted by the Society. encountered in machinery spaces. Components within the
protected spaces are to be designed to withstand the ele-
3.16.3 Control and indicating circuits relative to secondary
vated temperatures which could occur during a fire.
essential services and to non-essential services may be sup-
plied by distribution systems reserved for the purpose to the
satisfaction of the Society. 3.19.4 Degrees of protection are to be in accordance with
[4.2].
3.17 Power supply to the speed control sys-
tems of main propulsion engines 3.19.5 Systems requiring an external power source are to
be supplied by the main power source.
3.17.1 Electrically operated speed control systems of main
engines are to be fed from the main source of electrical 3.19.6 In case of activation of the system, an alarm in
power. accordance with Ch 4, Sec 6, [4.7.4] is to be activated.

April 2007 Bureau Veritas 37

Pt C, Ch 2, Sec 3

4 Degrees of protection of the enclosures Note 1: The water pressure testing of the enclosures protected to
IP X8 is to be based on the pressure that may occur at the location
of the component during flooding for a period of 36 hours.
4.1 General
4.2 Installation of electrical and electronic
4.1.1 The minimum required degree of protection for elec-
trical equipment, in relation to the place of installation, is
equipment in engine rooms protected by
generally that specified in Tab 2. fixed water-based local application fire-
fighting systems (FWBLAFFS)
4.1.2 Equipment supplied at nominal voltages in excess of
500 V and accessible to non-authorised personnel (e.g. 4.2.1 Unless it is essential for safety or operational pur-
equipment not located in machinery spaces or in locked poses, electrical and electronic equipment is not to be
compartments under the responsibility of the ship’s officers) located within areas protected by FWBLAFFS and in adja-
is to have a degree of protection against touching live parts cent areas where water may extend.
of at least IP 4X. The electrical and electronic equipment located within
areas protected by FWBLAFFS and those within adjacent
4.1.3 In addition to the requirements of this paragraph, exposed to direct spray are to have a degree of protection
equipment installed in spaces with an explosion hazard is not less than IP44.
also subject to the provisions of Ch 2, Sec 2, [6].
Electrical and electronic equipment within adjacent areas
4.1.4 The enclosures of electrical equipment for the moni- not exposed to direct spray may have a lower degree of pro-
toring and control of watertight doors which are situated tection provided evidence of suitability for use in these
below the bulkhead deck are to provide suitable protection areas is submitted taking into account the design and equip-
against the ingress of water. ment layout, e.g. position of inlet ventilation openings, fil-
ters, baffles, etc. to prevent or restrict the ingress mist/spray
In particular, the minimum required degree of protection is into the equipment. The cooling airflow for the equipment
to be: is to be assured.
• IP X7 for electric motors, associated circuits and control Note 1: Definitions (see Fig 2):
components
• protected space is a machinery space where a FWBLAFFS is
• IP X8 for door position indicators and associated circuit installed
components • protected areas: areas within a protected space which is
• IP X6 for door movement warning signals. required to be protected by FWBLAFFS
• adjacent areas:
Figure 2 : Definitions of areas • areas other those protected areas, exposed
• areas other those defined above, where water may extend.
Note 2: Additional precautions may be required to be taken in
respect of:
• tracking as the result of water entering the equipment
• potential damage as the result of residual salts from sea water
systems
• high voltage installations
• personnel protection against electric shock
Equipment may require maintenance after being subjected to water
mist/spray.

5 Diversity (demand) factors

5.1 General
5.1.1 The cables and protective devices of final sub-circuits
are to be rated in accordance with their connected load.
G Diesel engine
5.1.2 Circuits supplying two or more final sub-circuits are
to be rated in accordance with the total connected load
subject, where justifiable, to the application of a diversity
(demand) factor.

5.1.3 A diversity (demand) factor may be applied provided

Protected Adjacent area Adjacent area where
area : IP44 of direct spray: IP44 water may extend : that the known or anticipated operating conditions in a par-
evidence of suitability ticular part of an installation are suitable for the application
direct spray : IP44
of diversity.

38 Bureau Veritas April 2007

 Pt C, Ch 2, Sec 3

Table 2 : Minimum required degrees of protection

Switch- Accessories
Heat- Cook-
board, (e.g.
Condition in Example of Gener- Trans- Lumi- ing ing Socket
control gear, Motors switches,
location location ators formers naires appli- appli- outlets
motor connection
ances ances
starters boxes)
Danger of Dry accommoda-
touching live tion spaces, dry IP 20 X (1) IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20
parts only control rooms
Danger of Control rooms,
dripping liquid wheel-house, IP 22 X IP 22 IP 22 IP 22 IP 22 IP 22 IP 22 IP 22
and/or radio room
moderate Engine and boiler
mechanical IP 22 IP 22 IP 22 IP 22 IP 22 IP 22 IP 22 IP 44 IP 44
rooms above floor
damage
Steering gear
IP 22 IP 22 IP 22 IP 22 IP 22 IP 22 X IP 44 IP 44
rooms
Emergency
IP 22 IP 22 IP 22 IP 22 IP 22 IP 22 X IP 44 IP 44
machinery rooms
General
IP 22 X IP 22 IP 22 IP 22 IP 22 X IP 22 IP 44
storerooms
Pantries IP 22 X IP 22 IP 22 IP 22 IP 22 IP 22 IP 44 IP 44
Provision rooms IP 22 X IP 22 IP 22 IP 22 IP 22 X IP 44 IP 44
Ventilation ducts X X IP 22 X X X X X X
Increased Bathrooms and/or
X X X X IP 34 IP 44 X IP 55 IP 55
danger of showers
liquid and/or Engine and boiler
mechanical X X IP 44 X IP 34 IP 44 X X IP 55
rooms below floor
damage
Closed fuel oil
IP 44 X IP 44 IP 44 IP 34 IP 44 X X IP 55
separator rooms
Closed
lubricating oil IP 44 X IP 44 IP 44 IP 34 IP 44 X X IP 55
separator rooms
Increased Ballast pump IP 44 IP 44
IP 44 X IP 34 IP 44 X IP 55 IP 55
danger of rooms (2) (2)
liquid and Refrigerated
mechanical X X IP 44 X IP 34 IP 44 X IP 55 IP 55
rooms
damage
Galleys and
IP 44 X IP 44 IP 44 IP 34 IP 44 IP 44 IP 44 IP 44
laundries
Public bathrooms
X X IP 44 IP 44 IP 34 IP 44 X IP 44 IP 44
and shower
Danger of Shaft or pipe
liquid spraying, tunnels in double IP 55 X IP 55 IP 55 IP 55 IP 55 X IP 56 IP 56
presence of bottom
cargo dust, Holds for general
serious mecha- X X IP 55 X IP 55 IP 55 X IP 56 IP 56
cargo
nical damage,
aggressive fumes Ventilation trunks X X IP 55 X X X X X X

Danger of liquid
in massive Open decks IP 56 X IP 56 X IP 55 IP 56 X IP 56 IP 56
quantities
(1) The symbol “X” denotes equipment which it is not advised to install.
(2) Electric motors and starting transformers for lateral thrust propellers located in spaces similar to ballast pump rooms may have
degree of protection IP 22.

April 2007 Bureau Veritas 39

Pt C, Ch 2, Sec 3

Table 3 : Required environmental categories

Location within main area

Inside cubicles, On machinery such as internal
Main areas on board General Masts
desks, etc. combustion engines, compressors
Machinery spaces, steering gear EC21 EC31 EC23 X (1)
Control room, accommodation EC21 EC31 X X
EC11C
Bridge EC21 EC31 X X
EC11C
Pump room, holds, rooms without heating EC41 X X X
Exposed decks EC41S X X EC42S
(1) The symbol “X” denotes locations which are generally not applicable.

6 Environmental categories of the 7.2 Short-circuit currents

equipment
7.2.1 In calculating the maximum prospective short-circuit
current, the source of current is to include the maximum
6.1 Environmental categories number of generators which can be simultaneously con-
nected (as far as permitted by any interlocking arrange-
6.1.1 The environmental categories of the electrical equip-
ments), and the maximum number of motors which are
ment, in relation to the place of installation, are generally to
normally simultaneously connected in the system.
be those specified in Tab 3.
The maximum number of generators or transformers is to be
6.1.2 For ships operating outside the tropical belt, the max- evaluated without taking into consideration short-term par-
imum ambient air temperature may be assumed as equal to allel operation (e.g. for load transfer) provided that suitable
+ 40°C instead of + 45°C, so that the first characteristic interlock is foreseen.
numeral changes from 1 to 3.
7.2.2 Short-circuit current calculations are to be performed
7 Electrical protection in accordance with a method recognised by the Society,
such as that given in IEC Publication 61363-1.

7.1 General requirements for overcurrent 7.2.3 In the absence of precise data concerning the charac-
protection teristics of generators, accumulator batteries and motors,
the maximum short-circuit currents on the main busbars
7.1.1 Electrical installations are to be protected against may be calculated as follows:
accidental overcurrents including short-circuit.
• for alternating current systems:
The choice, arrangement and performance of the various
protective devices are to provide complete and coordinated Iac = 10 ITG + 3,5 ITM
automatic protection in order to ensure as far as possible: Ipk = 2,4 Iac
• continuity of service in the event of a fault, through • for direct current systems supplied by batteries:
coordinated and discriminative action of the protective
devices Ip = K C10 + 6 ITM
• elimination of the effects of faults to reduce damage to where:
the system and the hazard of fire as far as possible.
Ip : Maximum short-circuit current
Note 1: An overcurrent is a current exceeding the nominal current.
Iac : r.m.s. value of the symmetrical component (at
Note 2: A short-circuit is the accidental connection by a relatively
the instant T/2)
low resistance or impedance of two or more points in a circuit
which are normally at different voltages. Ipk : Maximum peak value
ITG : Rated current of all generators which can be
7.1.2 Devices provided for overcurrent protection are to be
connected simultaneously
chosen according to the requirements, especially with
regard to overload and short-circuit. C10 : Battery capacity in Ah for a discharge duration
Note 1: Overload is an operating condition in an electrically of 10 hours
undamaged circuit which causes an overcurrent. K : Ratio of the short-circuit current of the batteries
to C10 (see Note 1)
7.1.3 Systems are to be such as to withstand the thermal
and electrodynamic stresses caused by the possible overcur- ITM : Rated current of all motors which are normally
rent, including short-circuit, for the admissible duration. simultaneously connected in the system.

40 Bureau Veritas April 2007

 Pt C, Ch 2, Sec 3

Note 1: For stationary batteries the following values may be 7.4.3 The rated short-circuit making capacity of every
assumed for guidance: mechanical switching device intended to be capable of
• vented lead-acid batteries: K = 8 being closed on short-circuit is to be not less than the maxi-
• vented alkaline type batteries intended for discharge at low mum value of the short-circuit current at the point of installa-
rates corresponding to a battery duration exceeding three tion. On alternating current this maximum value corresponds
hours: K = 15 to the peak value allowing for maximum asymmetry.
• sealed lead-acid batteries having a capacity of 100 Ah or more
7.4.4 Every protective device or contactor not intended for
or alkaline type batteries intended for discharge at high rates
corresponding to a battery duration not exceeding three hours: short-circuit interruption is to be adequate for the maximum
K = 30. short-circuit current liable to occur at the point of installa-
tion having regard to the time required for the short-circuit
to be removed.
7.3 Selection of equipment
7.4.5 The use of a protective device not having a short-cir-
7.3.1 Circuit-breakers of withdrawable type are required cuit breaking or making capacity at least equal to the maxi-
where they are not suitable for isolation. mum prospective short-circuit current at the point where it
is installed is permitted, provided that it is backed up on the
7.3.2 Equipment is to be chosen on the basis of its rated
generator side by a fuse or by a circuit-breaker having at
current and its making/breaking capacity.
least the necessary short-circuit rating and not being the
7.3.3 In the selection of circuit-breakers with intentional generator circuit-breaker.
short-time delay for short-circuit release, those of utilisation
7.4.6 The same fuse or circuit-breaker may back up more
category B are to be used and they are to be selected also
than one circuit-breaker where the circuits concerned do
taking into account their rated short-time withstand current
not involve essential services.
capacity (Icw).
For circuit-breakers without intentional short-time delay for 7.4.7 The short-circuit performance of the back-up arrange-
short-circuit release, circuit breakers of utilisation category ment is to be equal to the requirements of IEC Publication
A may be used and they are to be selected according to 60947-2 for a single circuit-breaker having the same short-
their rated service short-circuit breaking capacity (Ics). circuit performance category as the backed-up circuit-
Note 1: For the purpose of these Rules, utilisation categories A and breaker and rated for the maximum prospective short-cir-
B are defined as follows: cuit level at the supply terminals of the arrangement.
• utilisation category A: circuit-breakers not specifically intended
7.4.8 Circuit-breakers with fuses connected to the load side
for selectivity under short-circuit conditions with respect to
other short-circuit protective devices in series on the load side,
may be used, provided the back-up fuses and the circuit-
i.e. without an intentional short-time delay provided for selec- breakers are of coordinated design, in order to ensure that
tivity under short-circuit conditions the operation of the fuses takes place in due time so as to
prevent arcing between poles or against metal parts of the
• utilisation category B: circuit-breakers specifically intended for
selectivity under short-circuit conditions with respect to other circuit-breakers when they are submitted to overcurrents
short-circuit protective devices in series on the load side, i.e. involving the operation of the fuse.
with an intentional short-time delay (which may be adjustable)
provided for selectivity under short-circuit conditions. 7.4.9 When determining the performance requirements for
the above-mentioned back-up protection arrangement, it is
7.3.4 For duplicated essential services and non-essential permissible to take into account the impedance of the vari-
services, circuit-breakers may be selected according to their ous circuit elements of the arrangement, such as the imped-
ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity (Icu). ance of a cable connection when the backed-up circuit-
breaker is located away from the back-up breaker or fuse.
7.3.5 For switches, the making/breaking capacity is to be in
accordance with utilisation category AC-22 A or DC-22 A 7.5 Continuity of supply and continuity of service
(in compliance with IEC Publication 60947-3).
7.5.1 The protection of circuits is to be such that a fault in
7.3.6 For fuse-switch disconnectors or switch-disconnector one service does not cause the loss of any essential services.
fuse units, the making/breaking capacity is to be in accord-
ance with utilisation categories AC-23 A or DC-23 A (in 7.5.2 The protection of the emergency circuit is to be such
compliance with IEC Publication 60947-3). that a failure in one circuit does not cause a loss of other
emergency services.
7.4 Protection against short-circuit Note 1: The continuity of supply for the primary essential services
and the continuity of service for the secondary essential services
7.4.1 Protection against short-circuit currents is to be pro- are to be ensured.
vided by circuit- breakers or fuses. The continuity of supply is the condition for which during and after
a fault in a circuit, the supply to the healthy circuits (see circuit 3 in
7.4.2 The rated short-circuit breaking capacity of every pro- Fig 3) is permanently ensured.
tective device is to be not less than the maximum prospec- The continuity of service is the condition for which after a fault in a
tive value of the short-circuit current at the point of circuit has been cleared, the supply to the healthy circuits (see cir-
installation at the instant of contact separation. cuit 3 in Fig 3) is re-established.

April 2007 Bureau Veritas 41

Pt C, Ch 2, Sec 3

Figure 3 : Continuity of supply and continuity of service

Continuity of supply Before a fault During a fault After a fault

1 1 1

2 3 2 3 2 3
Continuity of service

1 1 1

2 3 2 3 2 3

7.6 Protection against overload For generators not arranged to operate in parallel with a
rated output equal to or less than 50 kVA, a multipole
7.6.1 Devices provided for overload protection are to have switch with a fuse in each insulated phase on the generator
a tripping characteristic (overcurrent-trip time) adequate for side may be accepted.
the overload ability of the elements of the system to be pro-
tected and for any discrimination requirements. 7.8.2 When multipole switch and fuses are used, the fuse
rating is to be maximum 110% of the generator rated current.
7.6.2 The use of fuses up to 320 A for overload protection
is permitted. 7.8.3 Where a circuit-breaker is used:
a) the overload protection is to trip the generator circuit-
7.7 Localisation of overcurrent protection breaker at an overload between 10% and 50% for an
overload of 50% of the rated current of the generator the
7.7.1 Short-circuit protection is to be provided for every time delay is not to exceed 2 minutes however, the fig-
non-earthed conductor. ure of 50% or the time delay of 2 minutes may be
7.7.2 Overload protection is to be provided for every non- exceeded if the construction of the generator permits this
earthed conductor nevertheless, in insulated single-phase b) the setting of the short-circuit protection is to instantane-
circuits or insulated three-phase circuits having substan- ously trip the generator circuit-breaker at an overcurrent
tially balanced loads, the overload protection may be omit- less than the steady short-circuit current of the generator.
ted on one conductor. Short time delays (e.g. from 0,5 s to 1 s) may be intro-
duced for discrimination requirements in "instantaneous"
7.7.3 Short-circuit and overload protective devices are not tripping devices.
to interrupt earthed conductors, except in the case of multi-
ple disconnection devices which simultaneously interrupt 7.8.4 For emergency generators the overload protection may,
all the conductors, whether earthed or not. instead of disconnecting the generator automatically, give a
visual and audible alarm in a permanently attended space.
7.7.4 Electrical protection is to be located as close as possi-
ble to the origin of the protected circuit. 7.8.5 After disconnection of a generator due to overload,
the circuit-breaker is to be ready for immediate reclosure.
7.8 Protection of generators
7.8.6 Generator circuit-breakers are to be provided with a
7.8.1 Generators are to be protected against short-circuits reclosing inhibitor which prevents their automatic reclosure
and overloads by multipole circuit-breakers. after tripping due to a short-circuit.

42 Bureau Veritas April 2007

 Pt C, Ch 2, Sec 3

7.8.7 Generators having a capacity of 1500 kVA or above 7.9.4 The protective devices of the circuits supplying
are to be equipped with a suitable protective device or sys- motors are to allow excess current to pass during transient
tem which, in the event of a short-circuit in the generator or starting of motors.
in the supply cable between the generator and its circuit-
breaker, will de-excite the generator and open the circuit- 7.9.5 Final sub-circuits which supply one consumer with
breaker (e.g. by means of differential protection). its own overload protection (for example motors), or con-
sumers which cannot be overloaded (for example perma-
7.8.8 Where the main source of electrical power is neces- nently wired heating circuits and lighting circuits), may be
sary for the propulsion of the ship, load shedding or other provided with short-circuit protection only.
equivalent arrangements are to be provided to protect the
generators against sustained overload. 7.9.6 Steering gear circuits are to be provided with short-
circuit protection only (see Ch 1, Sec 11, [2]).
7.8.9 Arrangements are to be made to disconnect or reduce
automatically the excess load when the generators are over- 7.10 Protection of motors
loaded in such a way as to prevent a sustained loss of speed
and/or voltage (see Ch 2, Sec 2, Tab 6). The operation of 7.10.1 Motors of rating exceeding 1 kW and all motors for
such device is to activate a visual and audible alarm. A time essential services are to be protected individually against
delay of 5-20 s is considered acceptable. overload and short-circuit. The short-circuit protection may
be provided by the same protective device for the motor
7.8.10 When an overload is detected the load shedding
and its supply cable (see [7.9.5]).
system is to disconnect automatically, after an appropriate
time delay, the circuits supplying the non-essential services 7.10.2 For motors intended for essential services, the over-
and, if necessary, the secondary essential services in a sec- load protection may be replaced by an overload alarm (for
ond stage. steering gear motors see Ch 1, Sec 11, [2]).
7.8.11 Alternating current generators arranged to operate in 7.10.3 The protective devices are to be designed so as to
parallel are to be provided with reverse-power protection. allow excess current to pass during the normal accelerating
The protection is to be selected in accordance with the period of motors according to the conditions corresponding
characteristics of the prime mover. to normal use.
The following values are recommended: If the current/time characteristic of the overload protection
device does not correspond to the starting conditions of a
• 2-6% of the rated power for turbogenerators
motor (e.g. for motors with extra-long starting period), pro-
• 8-15% of the rated power for diesel generators. vision may be made to suppress operation of the device
during the acceleration period on condition that the short-
The reverse-power protection may be replaced by other
circuit protection remains operative and the suppression of
devices ensuring adequate protection of the prime movers.
overload protection is only temporary.
7.8.12 Generators are to be provided with an undervoltage
7.10.4 For continuous duty motors the protective gear is to
protection which trips the breaker if the voltage falls to
have a time delay characteristic which ensures reliable ther-
70%-35% of the rated voltage.
mal protection against overload.
The undervoltage release also prevents the closing of the
circuit-breaker if the generator voltage does not reach a 7.10.5 The protective devices are to be adjusted so as to
minimum of 85% of the rated voltage. limit the maximum continuous current to a value within the
The operation of the undervoltage release is to be instanta- range 105% - 120% of the motor’s rated full load current.
neous when preventing closure of the breaker, but it is to be
7.10.6 For intermittent duty motors the current setting and
delayed for selectivity purposes when tripping the breaker.
the delay (as a function of time) of the protective devices are
to be chosen in relation to the actual service conditions of
7.9 Protection of circuits the motor.

7.9.1 Each separate circuit shall be protected against short- 7.10.7 Where fuses are used to protect polyphase motor
circuit and against overload, unless otherwise specified in circuits, means are to be provided to protect the motor
these Rules or where the Society may exceptionally other- against unacceptable overload in the case of single phasing.
wise permit.
7.10.8 Motors rated above 1 kW are to be provided with:
7.9.2 Each circuit is to be protected by a multipole circuit-
• undervoltage protection, operative on the reduction or
breaker or switch and fuses against overloads and short-cir-
failure of voltage, to cause and maintain the interruption
cuits.
of power in the circuit until the motor is deliberately
7.9.3 Circuits for lighting are to be disconnected on both restarted or
non-earthed conductors single-pole disconnection of final • undervoltage release, operative on the reduction or fail-
sub-circuits with both poles insulated is permitted only in ure of voltage, so arranged that the motor restarts auto-
accommodation spaces. matically when power is restored after a power failure.

April 2007 Bureau Veritas 43

Pt C, Ch 2, Sec 3

7.10.9 The automatic restart of a motor is not to produce a 7.13.4 Circuits whose failure could endanger operation,
starting current such as to cause excessive voltage drop. such as steering gear control feeder circuits, are to be pro-
In the case of several motors required to restart automati- tected only against short-circuit.
cally, the total starting current is not to cause an excessive
7.13.5 The protection is to be adequate for the minimum
voltage drop or sudden surge current to this end, it may be
cross-section of the protected circuits.
necessary to achieve a sequence start.

7.10.10 The undervoltage protective devices are to allow the 7.14 Protection of transformers
motor to be started when the voltage exceeds 85% of the
rated voltage and are to intervene without fail when the volt- 7.14.1 The primary winding side of power transformers is
age drops to less than approximately 20% of the rated volt- to be protected against short-circuit and overload by means
age, at the rated frequency and with a time delay as necessary. of multipole circuit-breakers or switches and fuses.
Overload protection on the primary side may be dispensed
7.11 Protection of storage batteries with where it is provided on the secondary side or when the
total possible load cannot reach the rated power of the
7.11.1 Batteries are to be protected against overload and transformer.
short-circuit by means of fuses or multipole circuit-breakers
at a position adjacent to the battery compartment. 7.14.2 The protection against short-circuit is to be such as
Overcurrent protection may be omitted for the circuit to the to ensure the selectivity between the circuits supplied by
starter motors when the current drawn is so large that is the secondary side of the transformer and the feeder circuit
impracticable to obtain short-circuit protection. of the transformer.

7.11.2 Emergency batteries supplying essential services are 7.14.3 When transformers are arranged to operate in paral-
to have short-circuit protection only. lel, means are to be provided so as to trip the switch on the
secondary winding side when the corresponding switch on
the primary side is open.
7.12 Protection of shore power connection

7.12.1 Permanently fixed cables connecting the shore con- 8 System components
nection box to the main switchboard are to be protected by
fuses or circuit-breakers (see [3.7.4]). 8.1 General

7.13 Protection of measuring instruments, 8.1.1 The components of the electrical system are to be
pilot lamps and control circuits dimensioned such as to withstand the currents that can pass
through them during normal service without their rating
7.13.1 Measuring circuits and devices (voltage transform- being exceeded.
ers, voltmeters, voltage coils of measuring instruments,
insulation monitoring devices etc.) and pilot lamps are to be 8.1.2 The components of the electrical system are to be
protected against short-circuit by means of multipole cir- designed and constructed so as to withstand for the admissi-
cuit-breakers or fuses. ble duration the thermal and electrodynamic stresses
caused by possible overcurrents, including short-circuit.
The protective devices are to be placed as near as possible
to the tapping from the supply.
The secondary side of current transformers is not to be pro-
9 Electrical cables
tected.
9.1 General
7.13.2 Control circuits and control transformers are to be
protected against overload and short-circuit by means of 9.1.1 All electrical cables and wiring external to equipment
multipole circuit-breakers or fuses on each pole not con- shall be at least of a flame-retardant type, in accordance
nected to earth. with IEC Publication 60332-1.
Overload protection may be omitted for transformers with a
rated current of less than 2 A on the secondary side. 9.1.2 In addition to the provisions of [9.1.1], when cables
are laid in bunches, cable types are to be chosen in compli-
The short-circuit protection on the secondary side may be ance with IEC Publication 60332-3 Category A, or other
omitted if the transformer is designed to sustain permanent means (see Ch 2, Sec 12) are to be provided such as not to
short-circuit current. impair their original flame-retarding properties.

7.13.3 Where a fault in a pilot lamp would impair the oper- 9.1.3 Where necessary for specific applications such as
ation of essential services, such lamps are to be protected radio frequency or digital communication systems, which
separately from other circuits such as control circuits. require the use of particular types of cables, the Society may
Note 1: Pilot lamps connected via short-circuit-proof transformers permit the use of cables which do not comply with the pro-
may be protected in common with control circuits. visions of [9.1.1] and [9.1.2].

44 Bureau Veritas April 2007

 Pt C, Ch 2, Sec 3

9.1.4 Cables which are required to have fire-resisting char- 9.3.2 Where cables are provided with armour or metallic braid
acteristics are to comply with the requirements stipulated in (e.g. for cables installed in hazardous areas), an overall imper-
IEC Publication 60331. vious sheath or other means to protect the metallic elements
against corrosion is to be provided (see Ch 2, Sec 9, [1.5]).
9.2 Choice of insulation
9.3.3 An impervious sheath is not required for single-core
9.2.1 The maximum rated operating temperature of the cables installed in tubes or ducts inside accommodation
insulating material is to be at least 10°C higher than the spaces, in circuits with maximum system voltage 250 V.
maximum ambient temperature liable to occur or to be pro-
duced in the space where the cable is installed. 9.3.4 In choosing different types of protective coverings,
due consideration is to be given to the mechanical action to
9.2.2 The maximum rated conductor temperature for nor-
which each cable may be subjected during installation and
mal and short-circuit operation, for the type of insulating
in service.
compounds normally used for shipboard cables, is not to
exceed the values stated in Tab 4. Special consideration will If the mechanical strength of the protective covering is con-
be given to other insulating materials. sidered insufficient, the cables are to be mechanically pro-
tected (e.g. by an armour or by installation inside pipes or
9.2.3 PVC insulated cables are not to be used either in conduits).
refrigerated spaces, or on decks exposed to the weather of
ships classed for unrestricted service.
9.3.5 Single-core cables for a.c. circuits with rated current
9.2.4 Mineral insulated cables will be considered on a case exceeding 20 A are to be either non-armoured or armoured
by case basis. with non-magnetic material.

9.3 Choice of protective covering 9.4 Cables in refrigerated spaces

9.3.1 The conductor insulating materials are to be enclosed
9.4.1 Cables installed in refrigerated spaces are to have a
in an impervious sheath of material appropriate to the
watertight or impervious sheath and are to be protected
expected ambient conditions where cables are installed in
against mechanical damage. If an armour is applied on the
the following locations:
sheath, the armour is to be protected against corrosion by a
• on decks exposed to the weather further moisture-resisting covering.
• in damp or wet spaces (e.g. in bathrooms)
• in refrigerated spaces 9.5 Cables in areas with a risk of explosion
• in machinery spaces and, in general
• where condensation water or harmful vapour may be 9.5.1 For cables in areas with a risk of explosion, see
present. [10.2].

Table 4 : Maximum rated conductor temperature

Maximum rated conductor

Abbreviated temperature, in °C
Type of insulating compound
designation
Normal operation Short-circuit
a) Thermoplastic:
- based upon polyvinyl chloride or copolymer of vinyl chloride and vinyl acetate PVC/A 60 150
b) Elastomeric or thermosetting:
- based upon ethylene-propylene rubber or similar (EPM or EPDM) EPR 85 250
- based upon high modulus or hardgrade ethylene propylene rubber HEPR 85 250
- based upon cross-linked polyethylene XLPE 85 250
- based upon rubber silicon S 95 95 350
- based upon ethylene-propylene rubber or similar (EPM or EPDM) halogen free HF EPR 85 250
- based upon high modulus or hardgrade halogen free ethylene propylene rubber HF HEPR 85 250
- based upon cross-linked polyethylene halogen free HF XLPE 85 250
- based upon rubber silicon halogen free HF S 95 95 350
- based upon cross-linked polyolefin material for halogen free cable (1) HF 85 85 250
(1) Used on sheathed cable only

April 2007 Bureau Veritas 45

Pt C, Ch 2, Sec 3

9.6 Cables in circuits required to be operable Other types of flame-retardant switchboard wiring may be
under fire condition accepted at the discretion of the Society.

9.6.1 Cables for services required to be operable under fire

conditions, including those for their power supplies, are to 9.9 Current carrying capacity of cables
be of a fire-resistant type where they pass through high fire
risk areas, and in addition for passenger ships, main vertical 9.9.1 The current carrying capacity for continuous service
fire zones, other than those which they serve. of cables given in Tab 5 to Tab 9 is based on the maximum
Systems that are self-monitoring, fail safe or duplicated with permissible service temperature of the conductor also indi-
cable runs as widely separated as is practicable may be cated therein and on an ambient temperature of 45°C.
exempted.
Note 1: In the case of cables for services required to be operable 9.9.2 The current carrying capacity cited in [9.9.1] is appli-
under fire conditions, the fire-resistant cables are to extend from cable, with rough approximation, to all types of protective
the control/monitoring panel to the nearest local distribution panel covering (e.g. both armoured and non-armoured cables).
serving the relevant area or zone.
Note 2: In the case of power supply cables used for services 9.9.3 Values other than those shown in Tab 5 to Tab 9 may
required to be operable under fire conditions, the fire-resistant be accepted provided they are determined on the basis of
cables are to extend from their distribution point within the space calculation methods or experimental values approved by
containing the emergency source of electrical power to the nearest
the Society.
local distribution panel serving the relevant area or zone.

9.6.2 Electrical services required to be operable under fire 9.9.4 When the actual ambient temperature obviously dif-
conditions include: fers from 45°C, the correction factors shown in Tab 10 may
• fire and general alarm system be applied to the current carrying capacity in Tab 5 to Tab 9.
• fire-extinguishing systems and fire-extinguishing medium
alarms
Table 5 : Current carrying capacity, in A,
• fire detection system in continuous service for cables based on maximum
• control and power systems to power operated fire doors conductor operating temperature of 60°C
and status indication for all fire doors (ambient temperature 45°C)
• control and power systems to power operated watertight
doors and their status indication Nominal section, Number of conductors
• emergency lighting in mm2 1 2 3 or 4
• public address system 1,5 10 9 7
• Low Location Lighting
2,5 17 14 12
• remote emergency stop/shutdown arrangements for sys-
tems which may support the propagation of fire and/or 4 23 20 16
explosion. 6 29 25 20
10 40 34 28
9.6.3 Cables for services required to be operable under fire
conditions, including their power supplies, are to be run as 16 54 46 38
directly as is practicable. 25 71 60 50
9.6.4 Cables connecting fire pumps to the emergency 35 88 75 62
switchboard shall be of a fire-resistant type where they pass 50 110 94 77
through high fire risk areas.
70 135 115 95

9.7 Cables for submerged bilge pumps 95 164 139 115

120 189 161 132
9.7.1 Cables and their connections to such pumps are to be
capable of operating under a head of water equal to their 150 218 185 153
distance below the bulkhead deck. The cable is to be 185 248 211 174
impervious-sheathed and armoured, is to be installed in 240 292 248 204
continuous lengths from above the bulkhead to the motor
terminals and is to enter the air bell from the bottom. 300 336 286 235
dc: 390 dc: 332 dc: 273
400
9.8 Internal wiring of switchboards and ac: 380 ac: 323 ac: 266
other enclosures for equipment dc: 450 dc: 383 dc: 315
500
ac: 430 ac: 366 ac: 301
9.8.1 For installation in switchboards and other enclosures
for equipment, single-core cables may be used without fur- dc: 520 dc: 442 dc: 364
630
ther protection (sheath). ac: 470 ac: 400 ac: 329

46 Bureau Veritas April 2007

 Pt C, Ch 2, Sec 3

Table 6 : Current carrying capacity, in A, Table 7 : Current carrying capacity, in A,

in continuous service for cables based on in continuous service for cables based on
maximum conductor operating temperature of 85°C maximum conductor operating temperature of 70°C
(ambient temperature 45°C) (ambient temperature 45°C)

Nominal section, Number of conductors

Nominal section, Number of conductors
in mm2 1 2 3 or 4
in mm2 1 2 3 or 4
1,5 15 13 11
1,5 21 18 15
2,5 21 18 15
2,5 28 24 20
4 29 25 20
4 38 32 27
6 37 31 26
6 49 42 34
10 51 43 36
10 67 57 47
16 68 58 48
16 91 77 64
25 90 77 63
25 120 102 84
35 111 94 78
35 148 126 104
50 138 117 97
50 184 156 129
70 171 145 120
70 228 194 160
95 207 176 145
95 276 235 193
120 239 203 167
120 319 271 223
150 275 234 193
150 367 312 257
185 313 266 219
185 418 355 293
240 369 314 258
240 492 418 344
300 424 360 297
300 565 480 396
dc: 500 dc: 425 dc: 350
dc: 650 dc: 553 dc: 455 400
400 ac: 490 ac: 417 ac: 343
ac: 630 ac: 536 ac: 441
dc: 580 dc: 493 dc: 406
dc: 740 dc: 629 dc: 518 500
500 ac: 550 ac: 468 ac: 385
ac: 680 ac: 578 ac: 476
dc: 670 dc: 570 dc: 469
dc: 840 dc: 714 dc: 588 630
630 ac: 610 ac: 519 ac: 427
ac: 740 ac: 629 ac: 518

9.9.8 The current carrying capacity of cables connected in

9.9.5 Where more than six cables are bunched together in
parallel is the sum of the current ratings of all parallel con-
such a way that there is an absence of free air circulating
ductors but the cables must have equal impedance, equal
around them, and the cables can be expected to be under
cross-section, equal maximum permissible conductor tem-
full load simultaneously, a correction factor of 0,85 is to be
peratures and follow substantially identical routing or be
applied.
installed in close proximity. Connections in parallel are only
permitted for cross-sections of 10 mm2 or above. When
9.9.6 Where a cable is intended to supply a short-time load equal impedance can not be assumed, a correction factor of
for 1/2-hour or 1-hour service (e.g. mooring winches or 0.9 is to be applied to the current carrying capacity.
bow thruster propellers), the current carrying capacity
obtained from Tab 5 to Tab 9 may be increased by applying
the corresponding correction factors given in Tab 11. 9.10 Minimum nominal cross-sectional area
of conductors
In no case is a period shorter than 1/2-hour to be used,
whatever the effective period of operation.
9.10.1 In general the minimum allowable conductor cross-
sectional areas are those given in Tab 13.
9.9.7 For supply cables to single services for intermittent
loads (e.g. cargo winches or machinery space cranes), the cur-
rent carrying capacity obtained from Tab 5 to Tab 9 may be 9.10.2 The nominal cross-sectional area of the neutral con-
increased by applying the correction factors given in Tab 12. ductor in three-phase distribution systems is to be equal to
at least 50% of the cross-sectional area of the phases, unless
The correction factors are calculated with rough approxi- the latter is less than or equal to 16 mm2. In such case the
mation for periods of 10 minutes, of which 4 minutes with a cross-sectional area of the neutral conductor is to be equal
constant load and 6 minutes without load. to that of the phase.

April 2007 Bureau Veritas 47

Pt C, Ch 2, Sec 3

Table 8 : Current carrying capacity, in A, Table 9 : Current carrying capacity, in A,

in continuous service for cables based on in continuous service for cables based on
maximum conductor operating temperature of 90°C maximum conductor operating temperature of 95°C
(ambient temperature 45°C) (ambient temperature 45°C)

Nominal section Number of conductors Nominal section Number of conductors

(mm2 ) 1 2 3 or 4 (mm2) 1 2 3 or 4
1,5 23 20 16 1,5 26 22 18
2,5 40 26 21 2,5 32 27 22
4 51 34 28 4 43 37 30
6 52 44 36 6 55 47 39
10 72 61 50 10 76 65 53
16 96 82 67 16 102 87 71
25 127 108 89 25 135 115 95
35 157 133 110 35 166 141 116
50 196 167 137 50 208 177 146
70 242 206 169 70 256 218 179
95 293 249 205 95 310 264 217
120 339 288 237 120 359 305 251
150 389 331 272 150 412 350 288
185 444 377 311 185 470 400 329
240 522 444 365 240 553 470 387
300 601 511 421 300 636 541 445
dc: 690 dc: 587 dc: 483 dc: 760 dc: 646 dc: 532
400 400
ac: 670 ac: 570 ac: 469 ac: 725 ac: 616 ac: 508
dc: 780 dc: 663 dc: 546 dc: 875 dc: 744 dc: 612
500 500
ac: 720 ac: 612 ac: 504 ac: 810 ac: 689 ac: 567
dc: 890 dc: 757 dc: 623 dc: 1010 dc: 859 dc: 707
630 630
ac: 780 ac: 663 ac: 546 ac: 900 ac: 765 ac: 630

Table 10 : Correction factors for various ambient air temperatures

Maximum conductor Correction factors for ambient air temperature of:

temperature, in °C 35°C 40°C 45°C 50°C 55°C 60°C 65°C 70°C 75°C 80°C 85°C
60 1,29 1,15 1,00 0,82 − − − − − − −
75 1,15 1,08 1,00 0,91 0,82 0,71 0,58 − − − −
80 1,13 1,07 1,00 0,93 0,85 0,76 0,65 0,53 − − −
85 1,12 1,06 1,00 0,94 0,87 0,79 0,71 0,61 0,50 − −
95 1,10 1,05 1,00 0,95 0,89 0,84 0,77 0,71 0,63 0,55 0,45

9.10.3 For the nominal cross-sectional area of: 9.11.2 The nominal cross-sectional area of each cable is to
• earthing conductors, see Ch 2, Sec 12, [2.3] be sufficient to satisfy the following conditions with refer-
• earthing connections for distribution systems, see Ch 2, ence to the maximum anticipated ambient temperature:
Sec 12, [2.5] • the current carrying capacity is to be not less than the
• neutral connections for three-phase systems, see Ch 2, highest continuous load carried by the cable
Sec 8, [1.2.4]. • the voltage drop in the circuit, by full load on this cir-
cuit, is not to exceed the specified limits
9.11 Choice of cables • the cross-sectional area calculated on the basis of the
above is to be such that the temperature increases
9.11.1 The rated voltage of any cable is to be not lower which may be caused by overcurrents or starting tran-
than the nominal voltage of the circuit for which it is used. sients do not damage the insulation.

48 Bureau Veritas April 2007

 Pt C, Ch 2, Sec 3

Table 11 : Correction factors for short-time loads

1/2-hour service 1-hour service

Sum of nominal cross-sectional areas of all conductors, Sum of nominal cross-sectional areas of all conductors,
in mm2 in mm2 Correction
factor
Cables with non-metallic Cables with non-metallic
Cables with metallic sheath Cables with metallic sheath
sheath and non-armoured sheath and non-armoured
and armoured cables and armoured cables
cables cables
up to 20 up to 75 up to 80 up to 230 1,06
21 - 41 76 - 125 81 - 170 231 - 400 1,10
41 - 65 126 - 180 171 - 250 401 - 600 1,15
66 - 95 181 - 250 251 - 430 601 - 800 1,20
96 - 135 251 - 320 431 - 600 − 1,25
136 - 180 321 - 400 601 - 800 − 1,30
181 - 235 401 - 500 − − 1,35
236 - 285 501 - 600 − − 1,40
286 - 350 − − − 1,45

9.11.4 When the conductors are carrying the maximum

Table 12 : Correction factors for intermittent service nominal service current, the voltage drop from the main or
emergency switchboard busbars to any point in the installa-
Sum of nominal cross-sectional areas tion is not to exceed 6% of the nominal voltage.
of all conductors, in mm2 Correction For battery circuits with supply voltage less than 55 V, this
Cables with metallic Cables without factor value may be increased to 10%.
sheath and armoured metallic sheath and For the circuits of navigation lights, the voltage drop is not
cables non-armoured cables to exceed 5% of the rated voltage under normal conditions.
S≤5 1,10
5<S≤8 1,15 10 Electrical installations in hazardous
8 < S ≤ 16 1,20 areas
S≤4 16 < S ≤ 25 1,25
4<S≤7 25 < S ≤ 42 1,30 10.1 Electrical equipment
7 < S ≤ 17 42 < S ≤ 72 1,35
10.1.1 No electrical equipment is to be installed in hazard-
17 < S ≤ 42 72 < S ≤ 140 1,40 ous areas unless the Society is satisfied that such equipment
42 < S ≤ 110 140 < S 1,45 is:
110 < S − 1,50 • essential for operational purposes
• of a type which will not ignite the mixture concerned
9.11.3 The highest continuous load carried by a cable is to
be calculated on the basis of the power requirements and of • appropriate to the space concerned, and
the diversity factor of the loads and machines supplied • appropriately certified for safe usage in the dusts,
through that cable. vapours or gases likely to be encountered.

Table 13 : Minimum nominal cross-sectional areas

Nominal cross-sectional area, in mm2

Service
External wiring Internal wiring
Power, heating and lighting systems 1,0 1,0
Control circuits for power plant 1,0 1,0
Control circuits other than those for power plant 0,75 0,5
Control circuits for telecommunications, measurement, alarms 0,5 0,2
Telephone and bell equipment, not required for the safety of the ship or crew calls 0,2 0,1
Bus and data cables 0,2 0,1

April 2007 Bureau Veritas 49

Pt C, Ch 2, Sec 3

10.1.2 Where electrical equipment of a safe type is permit- • tested specially for Zone 2 (e.g. type “n” protection)
ted in hazardous areas it is to be selected with due consid- • pressurised, and accepted by the appropriate authority
eration to the following:
• encapsulated, and accepted by the appropriate authority
a) risk of explosive dust concentration (see Ch 2, Sec 2,
• the type which ensures the absence of sparks and arcs
[6.2]):
and of “hot spots” during its normal operation (mini-
• degree of protection of the enclosure mum class of protection IP 55).
• maximum surface temperature
10.1.8 When apparatus incorporates a number of types of
b) risk of explosive gas atmosphere (see Ch 2, Sec 2, [6.1]):
protection, it is to be ensured that all are suitable for use in
• explosion group the zone in which it is located.
• temperature class.

10.1.3 Where electrical equipment is permitted in hazard- 10.2 Electrical cables

ous areas, all switches and protective devices are to inter-
10.2.1 Electrical cables are not to be installed in hazardous
rupt all poles or phases and, where practicable, to be
areas except as specifically permitted or when associated
located in a non-hazardous area unless specifically permit-
with intrinsically safe circuits.
ted otherwise.
Such switches and equipment located in hazardous areas 10.2.2 All cables installed in Zone 0, Zone 1 or weather
are to be suitably labelled for identification purposes. exposed areas are to be sheathed with at least one of the
following:
10.1.4 Electrical installations in hazardous areas are to be
inspected by skilled personnel at their initial installation a) a non-metallic impervious sheath in combination with
and regularly during their life time. braiding or other metallic covering
The requirements of IEC 60079-17 apply. b) a copper or stainless steel sheath (for mineral insulated
cables only).
10.1.5 For electrical equipment installed in Zone 0 hazard-
ous areas, only the following types are permitted: 10.2.3 All cables installed in non-weather exposed Zone 2
• certified intrinsically-safe apparatus Ex(ia) areas are to be provided with at least a non-metallic exter-
nal impervious sheath.
• simple electrical apparatus and components (e.g. ther-
mocouples, photocells, strain gauges, junction boxes, 10.2.4 Cables of intrinsically safe circuits are to have a
switching devices), included in intrinsically-safe circuits metallic shielding with at least a non-metallic external
of category “ia” not capable of storing or generating impervious sheath.
electrical power or energy in excess of limits stated in
the relevant rules, and accepted by the appropriate 10.2.5 The circuits of a category “ib” intrinsically safe sys-
authority tem are not to be contained in a cable associated with a cat-
• equipment specifically designed and certified by the egory “ia” intrinsically safe system required for a hazardous
appropriate authority for use in Zone 0. area in which only category “ia” systems are permitted.

10.1.6 For electrical equipment installed in Zone 1 hazard- 10.3 Electrical installations in battery rooms
ous areas, only the following types are permitted:
• any type that may be considered for Zone 0 10.3.1 Only lighting fittings may be installed in compart-
• certified intrinsically-safe apparatus Ex(ib) ments assigned solely to large vented storage batteries (see
Ch 2, Sec 11, [6.2.1]).
• simple electrical apparatus and components (e.g. ther-
mocouples, photocells, strain gauges, junction boxes, The associated switches are to be installed outside such
switching devices), included in intrinsically-safe circuits spaces.
of category “ib” not capable of storing or generating Electric ventilator motors are to be outside ventilation ducts
electrical power or energy in excess of limits stated in and, if within 3 m of the exhaust end of the duct, they are to
the relevant rules, and accepted by the appropriate be of an explosion-proof safe type. The impeller of the fan is
authority to be of the non-sparking type.
• certified flameproof Ex(d) Overcurrent protective devices are to be installed as close
• certified pressurised Ex(p) as possible to, but outside of, battery rooms.
• certified increased safety Ex(e) Electrical cables other than those pertaining to the equip-
• certified encapsulated Ex(m) ment arranged in battery rooms are not permitted.
• certified sand filled Ex(q)
10.3.2 Electrical equipment for use in battery rooms is to
• certified specially Ex(s) have minimum explosion group IIC and temperature class
• through runs of cable. T1.
10.1.7 For electrical equipment installed in Zone 2 hazard- 10.3.3 Standard marine electrical equipment may be
ous areas, only the following types are permitted: installed in compartments assigned solely to valve-regu-
• any type that may be considered for Zone 1 lated sealed storage batteries.

50 Bureau Veritas April 2007

 Pt C, Ch 2, Sec 3

10.4 Electrical installations in paint stores or 10.4.5 Enclosed spaces giving access to paint stores may
enclosed spaces leading to paint stores be considered as non-hazardous, provided that:
• the door to the paint store is a gastight door with self-
10.4.1 Electrical equipment is to be installed in paint stores closing devices without holding back arrangements
and in ventilation ducts serving such spaces only when it is • the paint store is provided with an acceptable, inde-
essential for operational services. pendent, natural ventilation system ventilated from a
Certified safe type equipment of the following type is safe area
acceptable: • warning notices are fitted adjacent to the paint store
• certified intrinsically-safe apparatus Ex(i) entrance stating that the store contains flammable liq-
• certified flameproof Ex(d) uids.
• certified pressurised Ex(p) Note 1: The paint stores and inlet and exhaust ventilation ducts
• certified increased safety Ex(e) under [10.4.4] are classified as Zone 1 and areas on open deck
under [10.4.4] are classified as Zone 2 as defined in IEC standard
• certified specially Ex(s).
60092-502.
Cables (through runs or termination cables) of armoured Note 2: A watertight door may be considered as being gastight.
type or installed in metallic conduit are to be used.
10.5 Electrical installations in stores for
10.4.2 Switches, protective devices and motor control gear
of electrical equipment installed in a paint store are to inter-
welding gas (acetylene) bottles
rupt all poles or phases and are preferably to be located in a 10.5.1 The following equipment may be installed in stores
non hazardous space. for welding gas bottles provided that it is of a safe type
appropriate for Zone 1 area installation:
10.4.3 Electrical equipment for use in paint stores is to
have minimum explosion group IIB and temperature class • lighting fittings
T3. • ventilator motors where provided.

10.4.4 In the areas on open deck within 1 m of inlet and 10.5.2 Electrical cables other than those pertaining to the
exhaust ventilation openings of paint stores or 3 m of equipment arranged in stores for welding gas bottles are not
exhaust mechanical ventilation outlets of such spaces, fol- permitted.
lowing electrical equipment may be installed:
10.5.3 Electrical equipment for use in stores for welding
• electrical equipment with the type of protection as per-
gas bottles is to have minimum explosion group IIC and
mitted in paint stores, or
temperature class T2.
• equipment of protection class Exn, or
• appliances which do not generate arcs in service and 10.6 Special ships
whose surface does not reach unacceptably high tem-
perature, or 10.6.1 For installations in hazardous areas in:
• appliances with simplified pressurised enclosures or • oil tankers, chemical tankers and liquefied gas carriers,
vapour proof enclosures( minimum class of protection see Pt D, Ch 7, Sec 5, Pt D, Ch 8, Sec 10 or Pt D, Ch 9,
IP55) whose surface does not reach unacceptably high Sec 10
temperature • ships arranged with spaces for the carriage of vehicles,
• cables as specified in [10.4.1]. see Pt D, Ch 1, Sec 4 or Pt D, Ch 12, Sec 4.

April 2007 Bureau Veritas 51

Pt C, Ch 2, Sec 4

SECTION 4 ROTATING MACHINES

1 Constructional and operational 1.2.3 Sliprings, commutators and brushgear are to be read-
ily accessible for inspection, repairs and maintenance.
requirements for generators and
motors
1.3 Terminal connectors

1.1 Mechanical construction 1.3.1 Suitable, fixed terminal connectors are to be pro-
vided in an accessible position for connection of the exter-
1.1.1 Materials and construction of electrical machines are nal cables.
to conform to the relevant requirements of Ch 2, Sec 2, [4]
and Ch 2, Sec 2, [5]. 1.3.2 All terminal connectors are to be clearly identified
with reference to a diagram.
1.1.2 Shafts are to be made of material complying with the
provisions of NR216 Materials and Welding, Ch 2, Sec 3 or, 1.3.3 The degree of protection of terminal boxes is to be
where rolled products are allowed in place of forgings, with adequate to that of the machine.
those of NR216 Materialsand Welding, Ch 2, Sec 1.
1.4 Electrical insulation
1.1.3 Where welded parts are foreseen on shafts and rotors,
the provisions of NR216 Materials and Welding, Chapter 5 1.4.1 Insulating materials for windings and other current
are to apply. carrying parts are to comply with the requirements of Ch 2,
Sec 2, [4.2] and Ch 2, Sec 2, [4.3].
1.1.4 Sleeve bearings are to be efficiently and automati-
cally lubricated at all running speeds. 2 Special requirements for generators
Provision is to be made for preventing the lubricant from
gaining access to windings or other insulated or bare cur- 2.1 Prime movers, speed governors and
rent carrying parts.
overspeed protection
1.1.5 Means are to be provided to prevent bearings from
2.1.1 Prime movers for generators are to comply with the
being damaged by the flow of currents circulating between
relevant requirements of Ch 1, Sec 2, [2.8].
them and the shaft. According to the manufacturer’s
requirements, electrical insulation of at least one bearing is 2.1.2 When generators are to operate in parallel, the char-
to be considered. acteristics of speed governors are to comply with the provi-
sions of [2.2].
1.1.6 For surface-cooled machines with an external fan
installed on the open deck, adequate protection of the fan
against icing is to be provided. 2.2 A.c. generators

2.2.1 Alternators are to be so constructed that, when

1.1.7 When liquid cooling is used, the coolers are to be so
started up, they take up the voltage without the aid of an
arranged as to avoid entry of water into the machine,
external electrical power source.
whether by leakage or condensation in the heat exchanger,
and provision is to be made for the detection of leakage. Where these provisions are not complied with, the external
electrical power source is to be constituted by a battery
1.1.8 Rotating machines whose ventilation or lubrication installation in accordance with the requirements for electri-
system efficiency depends on the direction of rotation are to cal starting systems of auxiliary machinery (see Ch 1, Sec 2).
be provided with a warning plate.
2.2.2 The voltage wave form is to be approximately sinu-
soidal, with a maximum deviation from the sinusoidal fun-
1.2 Sliprings, commutators and brushes damental curve of 5% of the peak value.

1.2.1 Sliprings and commutators with their brushgear are to 2.2.3 Each alternator is to be provided with automatic
be so constructed that undue arcing is avoided under all means of voltage regulation.
normal load conditions.
2.2.4 For a.c. generating sets operating in parallel, the gov-
1.2.2 The working position of brushgear is to be clearly and erning characteristics regarding the load are to comply with
permanently marked. requirement of Ch 1, Sec 2, [2.8.5].

52 Bureau Veritas April 2007

 Pt C, Ch 2, Sec 4

Table 1 : Tests to be carried out on electrical rotating machines

a.c. Generators Motors

N° Tests
Type test (1) Routine test (2) Type test (1) Routine test (2)
1 Examination of the technical documentation, visual
X X X X
inspection in compliance with design drawings
2 Insulation resistance measurement (stator and rotor X X X X
windings)
3 Winding resistance measurement (stator and rotor) X X X X
4 Verification of the voltage regulation system X X (3)
5 Rated load test and temperature rise measurement X X
6 Overload/overcurrent test X X (4) X X (4)
7 Verification of steady short-circuit conditions (5) X
8 Overspeed test X X X (6) X (6)
9 Dielectric strength test (stator and rotor windings) X X X X
10 No load test X X X X
11 Verification of degree of protection X X
12 Verification of bearings X X X X
(1) Type test on prototype machine or test on at least the first batch of machines.
(2) The reports of machines routine tested are to contain the manufacturer’s serial number of the machine which has been type
tested and the test result.
(3) Only functional test of the voltage regulator system.
(4) Only applicable for machine of essential services rated above 100kW/kVA.
(5) Verification of steady short-circuit condition applies to synchronous machines only.
(6) Not applicable for squirrel cage motors.

2.2.5 When a.c. generators are operated in parallel, the Note 1: An alternative inspection scheme may be agreed by the
reactive loads of the individual generating sets are not to Society with the manufacturer whereby the attendance of the Sur-
differ from their proportionate share of the total reactive veyor will not be required as indicated above.
load by more than 10% of the rated reactive power of the
largest machine, or 25% of that of the smallest machine, 3.2 Shaft material
whichever is the lesser.
3.2.1 Shaft material for electric propulsion motors and for
main engine driven generators where the shaft is part of the
3 Testing of rotating machines propulsion shafting is to be certified by the Society.

3.1 General 3.2.2 Shaft material for other machines is to be in accord-

ance with recognised international or national standard.
3.1.1 All machines are to be tested by the manufacturers.
3.3 Tests
3.1.2 The manufacturer is to issue a test report giving, inter
alia, information concerning the construction, type, serial 3.3.1 Type test are to be carried out on a proptoype machine
number, insulation class and all other technical data rele- or on the first batch of machines, and routine tests carried
vant to the machine, as well as the results of the tests out on subsequent machines in accordance with Tab 1.
required.
3.3.2 Where the test procedure is not specified, the
Such test reports are to be provided to the Society, for requirements of IEC 60034-1 apply.
machines for essential services. For other machines, these
test reports are to be made available upon request of the
Society.
4 Description of test

3.1.3 All tests are to be carried out according to IEC Publi- 4.1 Technical documentation and visual
cation 60092-301. inspection
3.1.4 All machines of 100 KW and over, intended for 4.1.1 Technical documentation of machines rated at 100
essential services are to be surveyed by the Society during kW (kVA) and over are to be available for examination by
testing and, if appropriate, during manufacturing. the Surveyor.

April 2007 Bureau Veritas 53

Pt C, Ch 2, Sec 4

4.1.2 A visual inspection of the machine is to be made to 4.5 Rated load test and temperature rise
ensure, as far as practicable, that it complies with the tech- measurements
nical documentation.
4.5.1 The temperature rises are to be measured at the rated
4.2 Insulation resistance measurement out-put, voltage and frequency and for the duty for which
the machine is rated and marked in accordance with the
4.2.1 Immediately after the high voltage tests the insulation testing methods specified in IEC Publication 60034-1, or by
resistances are to be measured using a direct current insula- means of a combination of other tests.
tion tester between:
a) all current carrying parts connected together and earth 4.5.2 The limits of temperature rise above ambient air tem-
perature of 45°C for air-cooled machines are those given in
b) all current carrying parts of different polarity or phase, Tab 3 .
where both ends of each polarity or phase are individu-
ally accessible.
4.6 Overload/ overcurrent test
The minimum values of test voltages and corresponding
insulation resistances are given in Tab 2. The insulation 4.6.1 Overload test is to be carried out as a type test for
resistance is to be measured close to the operating tempera- generators as proof of overload capability of generators and
ture, or an appropriate method of calculation is to be used. the excitation system, for motors as proof of momentary
excess torque as required in IEC Publication 60034-1. The
Table 2 : Minimum insulation resistance over-load test can be replaced at a routine test by an over-
current test. The overcurrent test is to be proof of the current
Minimum Minimum insulation
Rated voltage Un V capability of the windings, wires, connections etc. of each
test voltage V resistance MΩ
machine. The overcurrent test can be performed at reduced
Un = 250 2 Un 1 speed (motors) or at short-circuit (generators).
250 < Un ≤ 1000 500 1
4.6.2 In the case of machines for special uses (e.g. for
1000 < Un ≤ 7200 1000 Un/1000 + 1 wind-lasses), overload values other than the above may be
7200 < Un ≤ 15000 5000 Un/1000 + 1 considered.

4.3 Winding resistance measurement 4.7 Verification of the steady short circuit
current
4.3.1 The resistances of the machine windings are to be
measured and recorded using an appropriate bridge 4.7.1 It is to be verified that under steady state short-circuit
method or voltage and current method. conditions, the generator with its voltage regulating system
is capable of maintaining, without sustaining any damage, a
4.4 Verification of the voltage regulation current of at least three times the rated current for a duration
of at least 2 s or, where precise data is available, for a dura-
4.4.1 The alternating current generator, together with its tion of any time delay which may be fitted in a tripping
voltage regulation system, is to be verified in such a way device for discrimination purposes.
that, at all loads from no load running to full load, the rated
voltage at the rated power factor is maintained under steady
conditions within ± 2,5%. These limits may be increased to 4.8 Overspeed test
± 3,5% for emergency sets.
4.8.1 Machines are to withstand the overspeed test as spec-
4.4.2 When the generator is driven at rated speed, giving its ified in IEC Publication 60034-1. This test is not applicable
rated voltage, and is subjected to a sudden change of sym- for squirrel cage motors.
metrical load within the limits of specified current and
power factor, the voltage is not to fall below 85% nor 4.9 Dielectric strength test
exceed 120% of the rated voltage.
4.9.1 New and completed rotating machines are to with-
4.4.3 The voltage of the generator is then to be restored to stand a dielectric test as specified in IEC Publication 60034-1.
within plus or minus 3% of the rated voltage for the main
generator sets in not more than 1.5 s. For emergency sets, 4.9.2 For high voltage machines an impulse test is to be
these values may be increased to plus or minus 4% in not carried out on the coils according to Ch 2, Sec 13.
more than 5 s, respectively.
4.9.3 When it is necessary to perform an additional high
4.4.4 In the absence of precise information concerning the voltage test, this is to be carried out after any further drying,
maximum values of the sudden loads, the following condi- with a test voltage of 80% of that specified in IEC Publica-
tions may be assumed: 60% of the rated current with a tion 60034-1.
power factor of between 0.4 lagging and zero to be sud-
denly switched on with the generator running at no load, 4.9.4 Completely rewound windings of used machines are
and then switched off after steady - state conditions have to be tested with the full test voltage applied in the case of
been reached. new machines.

54 Bureau Veritas April 2007

 Pt C, Ch 2, Sec 4

Table 3 : Temperature rise limits for air-cooled machines based on an ambient temperature of 45°C

Method of Temperature rise, in °C,

N° Part of machines measurement of by class of insulation
temperature (1) A E B F H
1 a) a.c. windings of machines having outputs of 5000 kW R 55 − 75 95 120
(or kVA) or more ETD 60 − 80 100 125
b) a.c. windings of machines having outputs of less than R 55 70 75 100 120
5000 kW (or kVA) ETD 60 − 85 105 125
2 Windings of armatures with commutators T 45 60 65 80 100
R 55 70 75 100 120
3 Field windings of a.c. and d.c machines having d.c. excitation T 45 60 65 80 100
other than those in item 4 R 55 70 75 100 120
4 a) Field windings of synchronous machines with cylindrical
R − − 85 105 130
rotors having d.c. excitation
b) Stationary field windings of d.c. machines having more than T 45 60 65 80 100
one layer R 55 70 75 100 120
ETD − − 85 105 130
c) Low resistance field windings of more than one layer, and
T, R (2) 55 70 75 95 120
compensating windings
d) Single-layer windings with exposed bare surfaces T, R (2) 60 75 85 105 130
5 Permanently short-circuited, insulated windings T 55 70 75 95 120
6 Permanently short-circuited uninsulated windings The temperature rise of these parts is in no case to reach
such a value that there is a risk of damage to any insulating
7 Magnetic core and other parts not in contact with windings
or other material on adjacent parts
8 Magnetic core and other parts in contact with windings T 55 70 75 95 120
9 Commutators and sliprings, open or enclosed (3) T 55 65 75 85 95
(1) T : Measurement by the thermometer method
R : Measurement by the resistance method
ETD : Measurement by embedded temperature detectors.
(2) Temperature rise measurement is to use the resistance method R whenever practicable.
(3) If commutators and sliprings are adjacent to windings with a lower insulation class, the temperature rises for this class apply.

4.9.5 Partially rewound windings are to be tested at 75% of 4.10 No load test
the test voltage required for new machines. Prior to the test,
the old part of the winding is to be carefully cleaned and 4.10.1 Machines are to be operated at no load and rated
dried. speed whilst being supplied at rated voltage and frequency
as a motor while generators are to be driven by a suitable
4.9.6 Following cleaning and drying, overhauled machines means and excited to give rated terminal voltage.
are to be subjected to a test at a voltage equal to 1,5 times
During the running test, the vibration of the machine and
the rated voltage, with a minimum of 500 V if the rated volt-
operation of the bearing lubrication system, if appropriate,
age is less than 100 V, and with a minimum of 1000 V if the
are to be checked.
rated voltage is equal to or greater than 100 V.

4.9.7 A repetition of the high voltage test for groups of 4.11 Verification of degree of protection
machines and apparatus is to be avoided if possible, but if a
test on an assembled group of several pieces of new appara- 4.11.1 As specified in IEC Publication 60034-5.
tus, each of which has previously passed its high voltage
test, is per-formed, the test voltage to be applied to such 4.12 Verification of bearings
assembled group is 80% of the lowest test voltage appropri-
ate for any part of the group. 4.12.1 Upon completion of the above tests, machines
Note 1: For windings of one or more machines connected together which have sleeve bearings are to be opened upon request
electrically, the voltage to be considered is the maximum voltage for examination by the Surveyor, to establish that the shaft is
that occurs in relation to earth. correctly seated in the bearing shells.

April 2007 Bureau Veritas 55

Pt C, Ch 2, Sec 4

5 Additional tests for rotating machines d) Frame

used as propulsion motor or thruster • visual examination in compliance with design draw-
ings
5.1 General
• liquid penetrant test of 10% of the structure welds
5.1.1 In addition to the tests defined in Tab 1, rotating and 100% of the handling points.
machines used as propulsion motor or thruster and devel-
e) Watercooler
oping a power of more than 1 MW are to be subjected to
the following requirements and tests during their assembly: • visual examination in compliance with design draw-
a) Shaft line ings
• requirements of Ch 1, Sec 7 apply • performance test (see temperature rise measurement
b) Rotor winding assembly test inTab 1)
• dynamic balancing
f) Hydrostatic jacking unit
c) Stator winding assembly
• pressure test
• dielectric test (after impregnation)
• insulation resistance measurement (after impregnation) • working test under nominal conditions

56 Bureau Veritas April 2007

 Pt C, Ch 2, Sec 5

SECTION 5 TRANSFORMERS

1 Constructional and operational For transformers with a power lower than 5 kVA per phase,
this voltage drop is not to exceed 5%.
requirements
An exception is made for special transformers, such as start-
ing and instrument transformers, for which a different volt-
1.1 Construction
age variation may be considered.
1.1.1 Transformers, except those for motor starting, are to
1.3.2 In determining the voltage ratio and the impedance
be double wound (two or more separate windings).
voltage of transformers, account is to be taken of the total
1.1.2 Transformers are normally to be of the dry, air-cooled permitted voltage drop from the main switchboard’s busbars
type. to the consumers (see Ch 2, Sec 3, [9.11.4]).

1.1.3 When a forced air cooling system is used, an alarm is 1.3.3 Transformers are to be constructed to withstand,
to be activated in the event of its failure. without damage, the thermal and mechanical effects of a
secondary terminal short-circuit for 2 s, with rated primary
1.1.4 Liquid-cooled transformers may be used provided voltage and frequency.
that: For transformers of 1 MVA and over, this is to be justified
• the liquid is non-toxic and of a type which does not with appropriate tests or documentation.
readily support combustion
1.3.4 When transformers are so arranged that their second-
• the construction is such that the liquid is not spilled in
ary windings may be connected in parallel, their winding
inclined position
connections are to be compatible, their rated voltage ratios
• temperature and pressure relief devices with an alarm are to be equal (with tolerances allowed) and their short-cir-
are installed cuit impedance values, expressed as a percentage, are to
• drip trays or other suitable arrangements for collecting have a ratio within 0,9 to 1,1.
the liquid from leakages are provided When transformers are intended for operation in parallel,
• a liquid gauge indicating the normal liquid level range the rated power of the smallest transformer in the group is to
is fitted. be not less than half of the rated power of the largest trans-
former in the group.
1.1.5 Transformers are to have enclosures with a degree of
protection in accordance with Ch 2, Sec 3, Tab 2.
1.4 Electrical insulation and temperature rise
1.2 Terminals 1.4.1 Insulating materials for windings and other current
carrying parts are to comply with the requirements of Ch 2,
1.2.1 Suitable fixed terminal connections are to be pro- Sec 2.
vided in an accessible position with sufficient space for
convenient connection of the external cables. 1.4.2 All windings of air-cooled transformers are to be suit-
ably treated to resist moisture, air salt mist and oil vapours.
1.2.2 Terminals are to be clearly identified.
1.4.3 The permissible limits of temperature rise with an
1.3 Voltage variation, short-circuit conditions ambient air temperature of 45°C for (natural or forced) air-
and parallel operation cooled transformers are given in Tab 1. The temperature
rises shown for windings refer to measurement by the resist-
1.3.1 Under resistive load (cos Φ = 1), the voltage drop ance method while those for the core refer to the thermom-
from no load to full load is not to exceed 2,5%. eter method.

Table 1 : Temperature rise limits for transformers

Temperature rise by class of insulation, in °C

N° Part of machine
A E B F H
1 Windings 55 70 75 95 120
2 Cores and other parts: a) the same values as for the windings
a) in contact with the windings b) in no case is the temperature to reach values such as to damage
b) not in contact with the windings either the core itself or other adjacent parts or materials

April 2007 Bureau Veritas 57

Pt C, Ch 2, Sec 5

1.4.4 For dry-type transformers cooled with an external liq- 2 Testing

uid cooling system, the permissible limits of temperature
rise with a sea water temperature of 32°C are 13°C higher
than those specified in Tab 1. 2.1 General
1.4.5 For liquid-cooled transformers, the following temper-
2.1.1 On new transformers intended for essential services
ature rises measured by the resistance method apply:
the tests specified in [2.2] are to be carried out.
• 55°C where the fluid is cooled by air
• 68°C where the fluid is cooled by water. 2.1.2 The manufacturer is to issue a test report giving, inter
alia, information concerning the construction, type, serial
1.5 Insulation tests number, insulation class and all other technical data rele-
vant to the transformer, as well as the results of the tests
1.5.1 Transformers are to be subjected to a high voltage test required.
in accordance with the procedure defined in IEC publica-
tion 60076-3. Such test reports are to be made available to the Society.

1.5.2 The test voltage is to be applied between each wind-

2.1.3 In the case of transformers which are completely
ing under test and the other windings not under test, core
identical in rating and in all other constructional details, it
and enclosure all connected together.
will be acceptable for the temperature rise test to be per-
Single-phase transformers for use in a polyphase group are formed on only one transformer.
to be tested in accordance with the requirements applicable
to that group. The results of this test and the serial number of the tested
transformer are to be inserted in the test reports for the other
1.5.3 The r.m.s. value of the test voltage is to be equal to transformers.
2 U + 1000 V, with a minimum of 2500 V, where U is the
rated voltage of the winding. The full voltage is to be main-
2.1.4 Where the test procedure is not specified, the
tained for 1 minute.
requirements of IEC 60076 apply.
1.5.4 Partially rewound windings are to be tested at 80% of
the test voltage required for new machines. 2.1.5 The tests and, if appropriate, manufacture of trans-
formers of 100 kVA and over (60 kVA when single phase)
1.5.5 The insulation resistance of a new, clean and dry intended for essential services are to be attended by a Sur-
transformer, measured after the temperature rise test has veyor of the Society.
been carried out (at or near operating temperature) at a volt-
age equal to 500 V d.c., is to be not less than 5 MΩ. Transformers of 5 kVA up to the limit specified above are
approved on a case by case basis, at the discretion of the
1.5.6 Transformers are to be subjected to an induced volt- Society, subject to the submission of adequate documenta-
age insulation test by applying to the terminals of the wind- tion and routine tests.
ing under test a voltage equal to twice the rated voltage. The
duration of the test is to be 60 s for any test frequency fp up
to and including twice the rated frequency fn. 2.2 Tests on transformers
If the test frequency exceeds twice the rated frequency, the
test time in seconds will be 120 fn / fp with a minimum of 2.2.1 Tests to be carried out on transformers are specified
15 s. in Tab 2.

Table 2 : Tests to be carried out on transformers

N° Tests Type test (1) Routine test (2)

1 Examination of the technical documentation, as appropriate, and visual inspection (3) X X
2 Insulation resistance measurement X X
3 Voltage drop X X
4 High voltage test X X
5 Temperature rise measurement X
6 Induced voltage test X X
7 Voltage ratio X X
(1) Type test on prototype transformer or test on at least the first batch of transformers.
(2) The certificates of transformers routine tested are to contain the manufacturer’s serial number of the transformer which has been
type tested and the test result.
(3) A visual examination is to be made of the transformer to ensure, as far as practicable, that it complies with technical
documentation.

58 Bureau Veritas April 2007

 Pt C, Ch 2, Sec 6

SECTION 6 SEMICONDUCTOR CONVERTORS

1 Constructional and operational 1.2.2 Overcurrent or overvoltage protection is to be

requirements installed to protect the convertor. When the semiconductor
convertor is designed to work as an inverter supplying the
network in transient periods, precautions necessary to limit
1.1 Construction the current are to be taken.

1.1.1 Semiconductor convertors are generally to comply 1.2.3 Semiconductor convertors are not to cause distortion
with the requirements for switchgear assemblies (see Ch 2, in the voltage wave form of the power supply at levels
Sec 8).
exceeding the voltage wave form tolerances at the other
user input terminals (see Ch 2, Sec 2, [2.4]).
1.1.2 The monitoring and control circuits are generally to
comply with the requirements of Part C, Chapter 3.
1.2.4 An alarm is to be provided for tripping of protective
1.1.3 For liquid-cooled convertors the following provisions devices against overvoltages and overcurrents in electric
are to be satisfied: propulsion convertors and for convertors for the emergency
source of power.
• liquid is to be non-toxic and of low flammability
• drip trays or other suitable means are to be provided to
1.3 Parallel operation with other power
contain any liquid leakages
sources
• the resistivity of the cooling fluid in direct contact with
semiconductor or other current carrying parts is to be
1.3.1 For convertors arranged to operate in parallel with
monitored and an alarm initiated if the resistivity is out-
other power sources, load sharing is to be such that under
side the specified limits.
normal operating conditions overloading of any unit does
1.1.4 Where forced cooling is used, the temperature of the not occur and the combination of paralleled equipment is
heated cooling medium is to be monitored. stable.

If the temperature exceeds a preset value an alarm is to be

given and the shutdown of the convertor is to be activated. 1.4 Temperature rise

1.1.5 Where forced (air or liquid) cooling is provided, it is 1.4.1 The permissible limit of temperature rise of the enclo-
to be so arranged that the convertor cannot be or remain sure of the semiconductors is to be assessed on the basis of
loaded unless effective cooling is maintained. an ambient air temperature of 45°C or sea water tempera-
Alternatively, other effective means of protection against ture of 32°C for water-cooled elements, taking into account
overtemperature may be provided. its specified maximum permissible temperature value.

1.1.6 Stacks of semiconductor elements, and other equip- 1.4.2 The value of the maximum permissible temperature
ment such as fuses, or control and firing circuit boards etc., of the elements at the point where this can be measured
are to be so arranged that they can be removed from equip- (point of reference) is to be stated by the manufacturer.
ment without dismantling the complete unit.
1.4.3 The value of the mean rated current of the semicon-
1.1.7 Semiconductor convertors are to be rated for the
ductor element is to be stated by the manufacturer.
required duty having regard to the peak loads, system tran-
sient and overvoltage and to be dimensioned so as to with-
stand the maximum short-circuit currents foreseen at the 1.5 Insulation test
point of installation for the time necessary to trip the protec-
tion of the circuits they supply.
1.5.1 The test procedure is that specified in IEC Publication
60146.
1.2 Protection
1.5.2 The effective value of the test voltage for the insula-
1.2.1 Semiconductor elements are to be protected against tion test is to be as shown in Tab 1.
short-circuit by means of devices suitable for the point of
installation in the network.

April 2007 Bureau Veritas 59

Pt C, Ch 2, Sec 6

Table 1 : Test voltages for high voltage test 2.2.4 An external bypass is to be provided.
on static convertors
2.2.5 The UPS unit is to be monitored and audible and vis-
ual alarm is to be given in a normally attended location for:
Um
-------
-= U Test voltage
2 • power supply failure (voltage and frequency) to the con-
V nected load
in V (1)
• earth fault
U ≤ 60 600
• operation of battery protective device
60 < U ≤ 90 900
• when the battery is being discharged
2 U + 1000
90 < U • when the bypass is in operation for on-line UPS units.
(at least 2000)
(1) Um: highest crest value to be expected between any
pair of terminals. 2.3 Location

2.3.1 The UPS unit is to be suitably located for use in an

2 Requirements for uninterruptible power emergency.
system (UPS) units as alternative
and/or transitional power 2.3.2 UPS units utilising valve regulated sealed batteries
may be located in compartments with normal electrical
equipment, provided the ventilation arrangements are in
2.1 Definitions accordance with the requirements of IEC 62040 or an
acceptable and relevant national or international standard.
2.1.1 Uninterruptible power system (UPS)
Combination of converters, switches and energy storage 2.4 Performance
means, for example batteries, constituting a power system
for maintaining continuity of load power in case of input 2.4.1 The output power is to be maintained for the duration
power failure (see IEC Publication 62040). required for the connected equipment as stated in Ch 2,
Sec 3, [3.6.3] and Pt D, Ch 11, Sec 5, [2.2.3].
2.1.2 Off line UPS unit
2.4.2 No additional circuits are to be connected to the UPS
A UPS unit where under normal operation the output load unit without verification that the UPS unit
is powered from the bypass line (raw mains) and only trans-
ferred to the inverter if the bypass supply fails or goes out- 2.4.3 has adequate capacity. The UPS battery capacity is, at
side preset limits. This transition will invariably result in a all times, to be capable of supplying the designated loads
brief (typically 2 to 10 ms) break in the load supply. for the time specified in the regulations.

2.1.3 Line interactive UPS unit 2.4.4 On restoration of the input power, the rating of the
An off-line UPS unit where the bypass line switch to stored charge unit shall be sufficient to recharge the batteries while
energy power when the input power goes outside the preset maintaining the output supply to the load equipment.
voltage and frequency limits.
3 Testing
2.1.4 On line UPS unit
A UPS unit where under normal operation the output load 3.1 General
is powered from the inverter, and will therefore continue to
operate without break in the event of the supply input fail- 3.1.1 Convertors intended for essential services are to be
ing or going outside preset limits. subjected to the tests stated in [2.2].

3.1.2 The manufacturer is to issue a test report giving infor-

2.2 Design and construction mation on the construction, type, serial number and all
technical data relevant to the convertor, as well as the
2.2.1 UPS units are to be constructed in accordance with results of the tests required.
IEC 62040, or an acceptable and relevant national or inter-
national standard. 3.1.3 In the case of convertors which are completely identi-
cal in rating and in all other constructional details, it will be
2.2.2 The operation of the UPS is not to depend upon acceptable for the rated current test and temperature rise
external services. measurement stipulated in [2.2] not to be repeated.

2.2.3 The type of UPS unit employed, whether off-line, line 3.1.4 The tests and, if appropriate, manufacture of conver-
interactive or on-line, is to be appropriate to the power sup- tors of 50 kVA and over intended for essential services are
ply requirements of the connected load equipment. to be attended by a Surveyor of the Society.

60 Bureau Veritas April 2007

 Pt C, Ch 2, Sec 6

3.2 Tests on convertors 3.3 Additional testing and survey for unin-
terruptible power system (UPS) units as
3.2.1 Convertors are to be subjected to tests in accordance alternative and/or transitional power
with Tab 2.
3.3.1 UPS units of 50 kVA and over are to be surveyed by
Type tests are the tests to be carried out on a prototype con- the Society during manufacturing and testing.
vertor or the first of a batch of convertors, and routine tests
3.3.2 Appropriate testing is to be carried out to demon-
are the tests to be carried out on subsequent convertors of a
strate that the UPS unit is suitable for its intended environ-
particular type.
ment. This is expected to include as a minimum the
following tests:
3.2.2 The electronic components of the convertors are to be
• functionality, including operation of alarms
constructed to withstand the tests required in Ch 3, Sec 6.
• ventilation rate
• battery capacity.
3.2.3 Final approval of convertors is to include complete
function tests after installation on board, performed with all 3.3.3 Where the supply is to be maintained without a break
ship’s systems in operation and in all characteristic load following a power input failure, this is to be verified after
conditions. installation by practical test.

Table 2 : Tests to be carried out on static convertors

N° Tests Type test (1) Routine test (2)

1 Examination of the technical documentation, as appropriate, and visual inspection (3)
X X
including check of earth continuity
2 Light load function test to verify all basic and auxiliary functions X X
3 Rated current test X
4 Temperature rise measurement X
5 Insulation test (dielectric strength test and insulation resistance measurement) X X
6 Protection of the convertors in case of failure of forced cooling system X X
(1) Type test on prototype convertor or test on at least the first batch of convertors.
(2) The certificates of convertors routine tested are to contain the manufacturer’s serial number of the convertor which has been
type tested and the test result.
(3) A visual examination is to be made of the convertor to ensure, as far as practicable, that it complies with technical
documentation.

April 2007 Bureau Veritas 61

Pt C, Ch 2, Sec 7

SECTION 7 STORAGE BATTERIES AND CHARGERS

1 Constructional requirements for 1.4 Tests on batteries

batteries
1.4.1 The battery autonomy is to be verified on board in
accordance with the operating conditions.
1.1 General
2 Constructional requirements for
1.1.1 The requirements of this Section apply to perma-
nently installed storage batteries (not to portable batteries).
chargers

1.1.2 Storage batteries may be of the lead-acid or nickel- 2.1 Characteristics

alkaline type, due consideration being given to the suitabil-
ity for any specific application. 2.1.1 Chargers are to be adequate for the batteries for which
they are intended and provided with a voltage regulator.
Other types of storage batteries of satisfactorily proven
design (e.g. silver/zinc) may be accepted provided they are 2.1.2 In the absence of indications regarding its operation,
suitable for shipboard use to the satisfaction of the Society. the battery charger is to be such that the completely dis-
charged battery can be recharged to 80% capacity within a
1.1.3 Cells are to be assembled in suitable crates or trays period of 10 hours without exceeding the maximum per-
equipped with handles for convenient lifting. missible charging current. A charging rate other than the
above (e.g. fully charged within 6 hours for batteries for
1.2 Vented batteries starting of motors) may be required in relation to the use of
the battery.
1.2.1 Vented batteries are those in which the electrolyte
2.1.3 For floating service or for any other condition where
can be replaced and freely releases gas during periods of
the load is connected to the battery while it is on charge,
charge and overcharge.
the maximum battery voltage is not to exceed the safe value
of any connected apparatus.
1.2.2 Vented batteries are to be constructed to withstand
the movement of the ship and the atmosphere (salt mist, oil Note 1: Consideration is to be given to the temperature variation of
the batteries.
etc.) to which they may be exposed.
2.1.4 The battery charger is to be designed so that the
1.2.3 Battery cells are to be so constructed as to prevent charging current is set within the maximum current allowed
spilling of electrolyte at any inclination of the battery up to by the manufacturer when the battery is discharged and the
40° from the vertical. floating current to keep the battery fully charged.

1.2.4 It is to be possible to check the electrolyte level and 2.1.5 Trickle charging to neutralise internal losses is to be
the ph. provided. An indication is to be provided to indicate a
charging voltage being present at the charging unit.
1.3 Valve-regulated sealed batteries
2.1.6 Protection against reversal of the charging current is
to be provided.
1.3.1 Valve-regulated sealed batteries are batteries whose
cells are closed under normal conditions but which have an 2.1.7 Battery chargers are to be constructed to simplify
arrangement which allows the escape of gas if the internal maintenance operation. Indications are to be provided to
pressure exceeds a predetermined value. The cells cannot visualise the proper operation of the charger and for trou-
normally receive addition to the electrolyte. bleshooting.
Note 1: The cells of batteries which are marketed as “sealed” or
“maintenance free” are fitted with a pressure relief valve as a safety 2.2 Tests on chargers
precaution to enable uncombined gas to be vented to the atmos-
phere; they should more properly be referred to as valve-regulated
2.2.1 Battery chargers are to be subjected to tests in
sealed batteries. In some circumstances the quantity of gas vented
can be up to 25% of the equivalent vented design. The design is to
accordance with Tab 1.
take into consideration provision for proper ventilation. Type tests are the tests to be carried out on a prototype
charger or the first of a batch of chargers, and routine tests
1.3.2 Cell design is to minimise risks of release of gas under are the tests to be carried out on subsequent chargers of a
normal and abnormal conditions. particular type.

62 Bureau Veritas April 2007

 Pt C, Ch 2, Sec 7

2.2.2 The electronic components of the battery chargers 2.2.3 The tests of battery chargers of 5 kW and over
are to be constructed to withstand the tests required in Ch intended for essential services are to be attended by a Sur-
3, Sec 6. veyor of the Society.

Table 1 : Tests to be carried out on battery chargers

N° Tests Type test (1) Routine test (2)

1 Examination of the technical documentation, as appropriate, and visual inspection (3)
X X
including check of earth continuity
2 Functional tests (current and voltage regulation, quick, slow, floating charge, alarms) X X
3 Temperature rise measurement X
4 Insulation test (dielectric strength test and insulation resistance measurement) X X
(1) Type test on prototype battery charger or test on at least the first batch of battery chargers.
(2) The certificates of battery chargers routine tested are to contain the manufacturer’s serial number of the battery charger which
has been type tested and the test result.
(3) A visual examination is to be made of the battery charger to ensure, as far as practicable, that it complies with technical
documentation.

April 2007 Bureau Veritas 63

Pt C, Ch 2, Sec 8

SECTION 8 SWITCHGEAR AND CONTROLGEAR ASSEMBLIES

1 Constructional requirements for 1.1.9 All parts of the switchboard are to be readily accessi-
main and emergency switchboards ble for maintenance, repair or replacement. In particular,
fuses are to be able to be safely inserted and withdrawn
from their fuse-bases.
1.1 Construction
1.1.10 Hinged doors which are to be opened for operation
1.1.1 Construction is to be in accordance with IEC Publica-
tion 60092-302. of equipment on the door or inside are to be provided with
fixing devices for keeping them in open position.
1.1.2 Where the framework, panels and doors of the enclo-
sure are of steel, suitable measures are to be taken to prevent 1.1.11 Means of isolation of the circuit-breakers of genera-
overheating due to the possible circulation of eddy currents. tors and other important parts of the installation are to be
provided so as to permit safe maintenance while the main
1.1.3 Insulating material for panels and other elements of busbars are alive.
the switchboard is at least to be moisture-resistant and
flame-retardant.
1.1.12 Where components with voltage exceeding the
1.1.4 Switchboards are to be of dead front type, with safety voltage are mounted on hinged doors, the latter are to
enclosure protection according to Ch 2, Sec 3, Tab 2. be electrically connected to the switchboard by means of a
separate, flexible protective conductor.
1.1.5 Switchboards are to be provided with insulated hand-
rails or handles fitted in an appropriate position at the front 1.1.13 All measuring instruments and all monitoring and
of the switchboard. Where access to the rear is necessary control devices are to be clearly identified with indelible
for operational or maintenance purposes, an insulated labels of durable, flame-retardant material.
handrail or insulated handles are to be fitted.

1.1.6 Where the aggregate capacity of generators con- 1.1.14 The rating of each circuit, together with the rating of
nected to the main busbars exceeds 100 kVA, a separate the fuse or the appropriate setting of the overload protective
cubicle for each generator is to be arranged with flame- device (circuit-breaker, thermal relay etc.) for each circuit is
retardant partitions between the different cubicles. Similar to be permanently indicated at the location of the fuse or
partitions are to be provided between the generator cubi- protective device.
cles and outgoing circuits.

1.1.7 Instruments, handles or push-buttons for switchgear 1.2 Busbars and bare conductors
operation are to be placed on the front of the switchboard.
All other parts which require operation are to be accessible 1.2.1 Busbars are to be of copper or of copper-surrounded
and so placed that the risk of accidental touching of live aluminium alloy if suitable for use in the marine environment
parts, or accidental making of short-circuits and earthings, and if precautions are taken to avoid galvanic corrosion.
is reduced as far as practicable.
1.2.2 All connections are to be so made as to inhibit corrosion.
1.1.8 Where it is necessary to make provision for the open-
ing of the doors of the switchboard, this is to be in accord-
ance with one of the following requirements: 1.2.3 Busbars are to be dimensioned in accordance with
IEC Publication 60092-302.
a) opening is to necessitate the use of a key or tool (e.g.
when it is necessary to replace a lamp or a fuse-link) The mean temperature rise of busbars is not to exceed 45°C
b) all live parts which can be accidentally touched after under rated current condition with an ambient air tempera-
the door has been opened are to be disconnected before ture of 45°C (see Ch 2, Sec 2, [1.2.2]) and is not to have any
the door can be opened harmful effect on adjacent components. Higher values of
temperature rise may be accepted to the satisfaction of the
c) the switchboard is to include an internal barrier or shut-
Society.
ter with a degree of protection not less than IP2X shield-
ing all live parts such that they cannot accidentally be
touched when the door is open. It is not to be possible 1.2.4 The cross-section of neutral connection on an a.c.
to remove this barrier or shutter except by the use of a three-phase, four-wire system is to be at least 50% of the
key or tool. cross-section for the corresponding phases.

64 Bureau Veritas April 2007

 Pt C, Ch 2, Sec 8

1.2.5 Bare main busbars, excluding the conductors 1.3.4 All conductors are to be secured to prevent vibration
between the main busbars and the supply side of outgoing and are to be kept away from sharp edges.
units, are to have the minimum clearances and creepage
distances given in Tab 1. The values shown apply to clear- 1.3.5 Connections leading to indicating and control instru-
ances and creepage distances between live parts as well as ments or apparatus mounted in doors are to be installed
between live parts and exposed conductive parts. such that they cannot be mechanically damaged due to
Note 1: Clearance is the distance between two conductive parts movement of the doors.
along a string stretched the shortest way between such parts.
Creepage distance is the shortest distance along the surface of an 1.3.6 Non-metallic trays for internal wiring of switchboards
insulating material between two conductive parts. are to be of flame-retardant material.

Table 1 : Clearance and creepage distances 1.3.7 Control circuits are to be installed and protected such
that they cannot be damaged by arcs from the protective
Rated insulation voltage Minimum Minimum creep- devices.
a.c. r.m.s. or d.c., clearance, age distance,
in V in mm in mm 1.3.8 Where foreseen, fixed terminal connectors for con-
≤ 250 15 20 nection of the external cables are to be arranged in readily
accessible positions.
> 250 to ≤ 690 20 25
> 690 25 35
1.4 Switchgear and controlgear
1.2.6 Reduced values as specified in IEC Publication
60092-302 may be accepted for type tested and partially 1.4.1 Switchgear and controlgear are to comply with IEC
type tested assemblies. Publication 60947 series and to be chosen from among that
The reference values for the evaluation of the minimum type approved by the Society.
clearances and creepage distances for these assemblies are
based on the following: 1.4.2 The characteristics of switchgear, controlgear and
• pollution degree 3 (conductive pollution occurs, or dry protective devices for the various consumers are to be in
non-conductive pollution occurs which becomes con- compliance with Ch 2, Sec 3, [7].
ductive due to condensation which is expected)
• overvoltage category III (distribution circuit level)
1.5 Auxiliary circuits
• unhomogenous field conditions (case A) 1.5.1 Auxiliary circuits are to be designed in such a manner
• rated operational voltage 1000 V a.c., 1500 V d.c. that, as far as practicable, faults in such circuits do not
• group of insulating material IIIa. impair the safety of the system. In particular, control circuits
are to be designed so as to limit the dangers resulting from a
Special consideration is to be given to equipment located in fault between the control circuit and earth (e.g. inadvertent
spaces where a pollution degree higher than 3 is applica- operation or malfunction of a component in the installa-
ble, e.g. in diesel engine rooms. tion), also taking account of the earthing system of their
supply.
1.2.7 Busbars and other bare conductors with their sup-
ports are to be mechanically dimensioned and fixed such
1.5.2 Auxiliary circuits of essential systems are to be inde-
that they can withstand the stresses caused by short-circuits.
pendent of other auxiliary circuits.
Where maximum symetrical short-circuit currents are
expected to exceed 50 kA, calculation is to be submitted to 1.5.3 Common auxiliary circuits for groups of consumers
the Society. are permitted only when the failure of one consumer jeop-
ardises the operation of the entire system to which it
1.2.8 Busbars and bare conductors are to be protected,
belongs.
where necessary, against falling objects (e.g. tools, fuses or
other objects).
1.5.4 Auxiliary circuits are to be branched off from the
main circuit in which the relevant switchgear is used.
1.3 Internal wiring
1.5.5 The supply of auxiliary circuits by specifically
1.3.1 Insulated conductors for internal wiring of auxiliary
arranged control distribution systems will be specially con-
circuits of switchboards are to be constructed in accord-
sidered by the Society.
ance with Ch 2, Sec 9, [1.1.5].

1.3.2 All insulated conductors provided for in [1.3.1] are to 1.5.6 Means are to be provided for isolating the auxiliary
be of flexible construction and of the stranded type. circuits as well when the main circuit is isolated (e.g. for
maintenance purposes).
1.3.3 Connections from busbars to protective devices are to
be as short as possible. They are to be laid and secured in 1.5.7 For the protection of auxiliary circuits see Ch 2, Sec 3,
such a way to minimise the risk of a short-circuit. [7.13].

April 2007 Bureau Veritas 65

Pt C, Ch 2, Sec 8

1.6 Instruments 1.6.12 Each secondary distribution system is to be provided

with one voltmeter.
1.6.1 The upper limit of the scale of every voltmeter is to be
not less than 120% of the rated voltage of the circuit in 1.6.13 Switchboards are to be fitted with means for moni-
which it is installed. toring the insulation level of insulated distribution systems
as stipulated in Ch 2, Sec 3, [3.2.1].
1.6.2 The upper limit of the scale of every ammeter is to be
not less than 130% of the normal rating of the circuit in 1.6.14 The main switchboard is to be fitted with a voltme-
which it is installed. ter or signal lamp indicating that the cable between the
shore-connection box and the main switchboard is ener-
1.6.3 The upper limit of the scale of every wattmeter is to gised (see Ch 2, Sec 3, [3.7.7]).
be not less than 120% of the rated voltage of the circuit in
which it is installed. 1.6.15 For each d.c. power source (e.g. convertors, rectifi-
ers and batteries), one voltmeter and one ammeter are to be
1.6.4 Ammeters or wattmeters for use with a.c. generators provided, except for d.c. power sources for starting devices
which may be operated in parallel are to be capable of indi- (e.g. starting motor for emergency generator).
cating 15% reverse-current or reverse power, respectively.
2 Constructional requirements for sec-
1.6.5 For wattmeters using one current circuit only, the
measurement of the current of all generators is to be made tion boards and distribution boards
in the same phase.
2.1 Construction
1.6.6 The rated value of the measure read, at full load, is to
be clearly indicated on the scales of instruments. 2.1.1 Section boards and distribution boards are to be con-
structed, insofar as applicable, as specified for main and
1.6.7 Frequency meters are to have a scale at least ± 5% of emergency switchboards.
the nominal frequency.
2.1.2 All parts which require operation in normal use are to
1.6.8 The secondary windings of instrument transformers be placed on the front.
are to be earthed.
2.1.3 Distribution switchboards which are provided with
1.6.9 Each a.c. generator not operated in parallel is to be two or more supply circuits arranged for automatic standby
provided with: connection are to be provided with positive indication of
• 1 voltmeter which of the circuits is feeding the switchboard.
• 1 frequency meter 2.1.4 Where switchboard supplying essential services is
• 1 ammeter in each phase or 1 ammeter with a selector provided with a forced air cooling system, the air tempera-
switch to enable the current in each phase to be read ture is to be monitored. An alarm is to be activated when
temperature exceeds a preset value.
• 1 three-phase wattmeter in the case of generators rated
more than 50 kVA.
3 Testing
1.6.10 Each a.c. generator operated in parallel is to be pro-
vided with:
3.1 General
• 1 three-phase wattmeter
• 1 ammeter in each phase or 1 ammeter with a selector 3.1.1 Switchboards are to be subjected to the tests speci-
switch to enable the current in each phase to be read. fied from [3.2] to [3.4].

1.6.11 For paralleling purposes the following are to be pro- 3.1.2 The manufacturer is to issue the relative test reports
vided: providing information concerning the construction, serial
number and technical data relevant to the switchboard, as
• 2 voltmeters well as the results of the tests required.
• 2 frequency meters
3.1.3 The tests are to be carried out prior to installation on
• 1 synchroscope and synchronising indicating lamps or board.
equivalent means.
3.1.4 The test procedures are as specified in IEC Publica-
A switch is to be provided to enable one voltmeter and one
tion 60092-302.
frequency meter to be connected to each generator before
the latter is connected to the busbars.
3.1.5 The tests of main switchboards, emergency switch-
The other voltmeter and frequency meter are to be perma- boards or switchboards rated above 100 kW are to be
nently connected to the busbars. attended by a surveyor of the Society.

66 Bureau Veritas April 2007

 Pt C, Ch 2, Sec 8

3.2 Inspection of equipment, check of wiring 3.3.3 The test voltage at the moment of application is not to
and electrical operation test exceed half of the prescribed value. It is then to be
increased steadily within a few seconds to its full value. The
3.2.1 It is to be verified that the switchboard: prescribed test voltage is to be maintained for 1 minute.
• complies with the approved drawings 3.3.4 The value of the test voltage for main and auxiliary
• maintains the prescribed degree of protection circuits is given in Tab 2 and Tab 3.
• is constructed in accordance with the relevant construc-
tional requirements, in particular as regards creepage Table 2 : Test voltages for main circuits
and clearance distances.
Rated insulation voltage Ui, Test voltage a.c. (r.m.s.),
in V in V
3.2.2 The connections, especially screwed or bolted con-
nections, are to be checked for adequate contact, possibly Ui ≤ 60 1000
by random tests. 60 < Ui ≤ 300 2000
3.2.3 Depending on the complexity of the switchboard it 300 < Ui ≤ 660 2500
may be necessary to carry out an electrical functioning test. 660 < Ui ≤ 800 3000
The test procedure and the number of tests depend on
800 < Ui ≤ 1000 3500
whether or not the switchboard includes complicated inter-
locks, sequence control facilities, etc. In some cases it may
be necessary to conduct or repeat this test following instal- Table 3 : Test voltage for auxiliary circuits
lation on board.

Rated insulation voltage Ui, Test voltage a.c. (r.m.s.),

3.3 High voltage test in V in V

3.3.1 The test is to be performed with alternating voltage at Ui ≤ 12 250

a frequency between 25 and 100 Hz of approximately sinu- 12 < Ui ≤ 60 500
soidal form.
Ui > 60 2 Ui + 1000 (at least 1500)
3.3.2 The test voltage is to be applied:
3.4 Measurement of insulation resistance
• between all live parts connected together and earth
• between each polarity and all the other polarities con- 3.4.1 Immediately after the high voltage test, the insulation
nected to earth for the test. resistance is to be measured using a device with a direct
current voltage of at least 500 V.
During the high voltage test, measuring instruments, ancil-
lary apparatus and electronic devices may be disconnected 3.4.2 The insulation resistance between all current carrying
and tested separately in accordance with the appropriate parts and earth (and between each polarity and the other
requirements. polarities) is to be at least equal to 1 MΩ.

April 2007 Bureau Veritas 67

Pt C, Ch 2, Sec 9

SECTION 9 CABLES

1 Constructional requirements 1.2.2 Individual conductor wires of rubber-insulated cables

are to be tinned or coated with a suitable alloy.

1.1 Construction 1.2.3 All conductors are to be stranded, except for cables
of nominal cross-sectional area 2,5 mm2 and less (provided
1.1.1 Cables and insulated wiring are generally to be con-
that adequate flexibility of the finished cable is assured).
structed in accordance with IEC Publications of the series
60092-3.., as well with the provisions of this Chapter.
1.2.4 For the minimum nominal cross-sectional areas per-
1.1.2 Mineral-insulated cables are to be constructed mitted, see Ch 2, Sec 3, [9.10].
according to IEC Publication 60702.
1.3 Insulating materials
1.1.3 Optical fibre cables are to be constructed in accord-
ance with IEC Publication 60794.
1.3.1 The materials used for insulation are to comply with
IEC Publication 60092-351 and to have the thicknesses
1.1.4 Flexible cables constructed according to national
specified for each type of cable in the relevant standard.
standards will be specially considered by the Society.
The maximum permissible rated temperature is specified for
the various materials.
1.1.5 Cables and insulated wires other than those specified
in IEC Publications are subject to special consideration by
the Society in each case. Those for general purposes are to 1.3.2 Materials and thicknesses other than those in [1.3.1]
be constructed of materials having characteristics which will be specially considered by the Society.
produce a cable at least equivalent to those constructed
from materials referred to in IEC Publications. 1.4 Inner covering, fillers and binders
1.1.6 Insulated wiring for auxiliary circuits of switchboards
1.4.1 The cores of a multicore cable are to be laid up. The
may be constituted by cables with a single conductor of the
spaces between the cores are to be filled so as to obtain an
stranded type for all sections, PVC- or rubber-insulated in
assembly having an essentially circular cross-section. The
accordance with the Publications cited in [1.1.1] and with-
filling may be omitted in multicore cables having a conduc-
out further protection.
tor cross-sectional area not exceeding 4 mm2.
The insulated wiring is to be at least of the flame-retardant
type according to IEC Publication 60332-1. Equivalent When a non-metallic sheath is applied directly over the
types of flame-retardant switchboard wires will be specially inner covering or the fillers, it may substitute partially for
considered by the Society. the inner covering or fillers.

1.1.7 Fire resistant cables are to be designed and tested in 1.4.2 The materials used, the binders and the thicknesses of
accordance with the relevant IEC Publication 60092-series the inner coverings are generally to be in accordance with
Standards and comply with the requirements of IEC 60331- IEC Publications of the series 60092-3.., in relation to the
31 for cables of greater than 20 mm overall diameter, other- type of cable.
wise IEC 60331-21.
Note 1:For installation methods refer to those specified in Ch 2, Sec 1.5 Protective coverings (armour and
12, [7.1.4]. sheath)
Note 2:Fire resistant type cables are to be easily distinguishable.
Note 3:For special cables, requirements in the following standards 1.5.1 Metallic armour, if not otherwise protected against
may be used : corrosion, is to be protected by means of a coating of pro-
tective paint (see Ch 2, Sec 3, [9.3]).
• IEC 60331-23: Procedures and requirements - Electric data cables
• IEC331-25: Procedures and requirements - Optical fiber cables 1.5.2 The paint is to be non-flammable and of adequate
viscosity. When dry, it is not to flake off.
1.2 Conductors
1.5.3 The materials and construction used for (metal)
1.2.1 Conductors are to be of annealed electrolytic copper armour are to be in accordance with IEC Publication
with a resistivity not exceeding 17.241 Ω mm2/km at 20°C 60092-350 and their dimensions are to be those specified
according to IEC 60228. for each type of cable in the relevant standard.

68 Bureau Veritas April 2007

 Pt C, Ch 2, Sec 9

1.5.4 The materials used for sheaths are to be in accord- 2.2 Routine tests
ance with IEC Publication 60092-359 and are to have the
thicknesses specified for each type of cable in the relevant 2.2.1 Every length of finished cable is to be subjected to the
standard. tests specified in [2.2.2].
The quality of the materials is to be adequate to the service
temperature of the cable. 2.2.2 The following routine tests are to be carried out:

1.5.5 Materials other than those in [1.5.3] and [1.5.4] will a) visual inspection
be specially considered by the Society. b) check of conductor cross-sectional area by measuring
electrical resistance
1.6 Identification
c) high voltage test
1.6.1 Each cable is to have clear means of identification so
d) insulation resistance measurement
that the manufacturer can be determined.
e) dimensional checks (as necessary).
1.6.2 Fire non propagating cables are to be clearly labelled
with indication of the standard according to which this 2.2.3 The manufacturer is to issue a statement providing
characteristic has been verified and, if applicable, of the information on the type and characteristics of the cable, as
category to which they correspond. well as the results of the tests required and the Type
Approval Certificates.
2 Testing
2.2.4 The test procedure is as specified in IEC Publication
2.1 Type tests 60092-350.

2.1.1 Type tests are to be in accordance with the relevant 2.2.5 Where an alternative scheme, e.g. a certified quality
IEC 60092-3.. Series Publications and IEC 60332-1, IEC assurance system, is recognised by the Society, attendance
60332-3 Category A, and IEC 60331 where applicable. of the Surveyor may not be required.

April 2007 Bureau Veritas 69

Pt C, Ch 2, Sec 10

SECTION 10 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT

1 Switchgear and controlgear, protec- 1.3.6 The reverse power protection device is to respond to
the active power regardless of the power factor, and is to
tive devices operate only in the event of reverse power.

1.1 General 1.3.7 Single-phase failure devices in three-phase circuits

are to operate without a time lag.
1.1.1 Switchgear and controlgear are to comply with IEC
Publication 60947. 1.3.8 Insulation monitoring devices are to continuously
monitor the insulation resistance to earth and trigger an
1.1.2 For materials and construction see Ch 2, Sec 2, [4] alarm should the insulation resistance fall below a predeter-
and Ch 2, Sec 2, [5]. mined value.
The measuring current of such devices is not to exceed 30
1.2 Circuit-breakers mA in the event of a total short to earth.

1.2.1 Power-driven circuit-breakers are to be equipped 2 Lighting fittings

with an additional separate drive operated by hand.

1.2.2 Power circuit-breakers with a making capacity

2.1 Applicable requirements
exceeding 10 kA are to be equipped with a drive which per- 2.1.1 Lighting fittings are to comply with IEC Publications
forms the make operation independently of the actuating 60598 and 60092-306.
force and speed.
Lighting fittings complying with other standards will be spe-
1.2.3 Where the conditions for closing the circuit-breaker cially considered by the Society.
are not satisfied (e.g. if the undervoltage trip is not ener-
gised), the closing mechanism is not to cause the closing of 2.2 Construction
the contacts.
2.2.1 The temperature of terminals for connection of sup-
1.2.4 All circuit-breakers rated more than 16 A are to be of plying cables is not to exceed the maximum conductor tem-
the trip-free type, i.e. the breaking action initiated by over- perature permitted for the cable (see Ch 2, Sec 3, [9.9]).
current or undervoltage releases is to be fulfilled independ- Where necessary, luminaires are to be fitted with terminal
ently of the position of the manual handle or other closing boxes which are thermally insulated from the light source.
devices.
2.2.2 Wires used for internal connections are to be of a
1.3 Protection devices temperature class which corresponds to the maximum tem-
perature within the luminaire.
1.3.1 Short-circuit releases are generally to be independent
2.2.3 The temperature rise of parts of luminaires which are
of energy supplied from circuits other than that to be pro-
in contact with the support is not to exceed 50°C. The rise is
tected. Tripping due to short-circuit is to be reliable even in
not to exceed 40°C for parts in contact with flammable
the event of a total loss of voltage in the protected circuit.
materials.
1.3.2 Short-circuit releases for generators are to be 2.2.4 The temperature rise of surface parts which can easily
equipped with reclosing inhibitors and are to be delayed for be touched in service is not to exceed 15°C.
selective tripping.
2.2.5 High-power lights with higher surface temperatures
1.3.3 Overload releases or relays are to operate reliably at than those in [2.2.2] and [2.2.3] are to be adequately pro-
any voltage variation of the supply voltage in the protected tected against accidental contact.
circuit.

1.3.4 Undervoltage relays or releases are to cause the cir- 3 Accessories

cuit-breaker to open if the voltage drops to 70%-35% of the
rated voltage. 3.1 Applicable requirements
1.3.5 Shunt releases are to ensure the disconnection of the 3.1.1 Accessories are to be constructed in accordance with
circuit-breaker even when the supply voltage of the release the relevant IEC Publications, and in particular with Publi-
drops to 85% of the rated supply voltage. cation 60092-306.

70 Bureau Veritas April 2007

 Pt C, Ch 2, Sec 10

3.2 Construction 5.2.3 The temperature of parts which are to be handled in

service (switch knobs, operating handles and the like) is not
3.2.1 Enclosures of accessories are to be of metal having to exceed the following values:
characteristics suitable for the intended use on board, or of • 55°C for metal parts
flame-retardant insulating material. • 65°C for vitreous or moulded material.
3.2.2 Terminals are to be suitable for the connection of
stranded conductors, except in the case of rigid conductors 5.3 Space heaters
for mineral-insulated cables.
5.3.1 The casing or enclosure of heaters is to be so
designed that clothing or other flammable material cannot
4 Plug-and-socket connections be placed on them.

5.3.2 The temperature of the external surface of space heat-

4.1 Applicable requirements ers is not to exceed 60°C.

4.1.1 Plug-and-socket connections are to comply with IEC 5.3.3 Space heaters are to be provided with a temperature
Publication 60092-306 and with the following additional limiting device without automatic reconnection which
standards in relation to their use: automatically trips all poles or phases not connected to
• in accommodation spaces, day rooms and service earth when the temperature exceeds the maximum permis-
rooms (up to 16 A, 250 V a.c.): IEC Publication 60083 sible value.
or 60320, as applicable
• for power circuits (up to 250 A, 690 V a.c.): IEC Publica-
5.4 Cooking appliances
tion 60309 5.4.1 Live parts of cooking appliances are to be protected
• for electronic switchgear: IEC Publications, e.g. 60130 such that any foods or liquids which boil over or spill do not
and 60603 cause short-circuits or loss of insulation.
• for refrigerated containers: ISO 1496-2.
5.5 Fuel oil and lube oil heaters
5 Heating and cooking appliances 5.5.1 In continuous-flow fuel oil and lube oil heaters, the
maximum temperature of the heating elements is to be
5.1 Applicable requirements below the boiling point of the oil.

5.5.2 Each oil heater is to be provided with a thermostat

5.1.1 Heating and cooking appliances are to comply with
maintaining the oil temperature at the correct level.
the relevant IEC Publications (e.g. those of series 60335),
with particular attention to IEC 60092-307. 5.5.3 In addition to the thermostat in [5.5.2], each oil
heater is to be provided with a temperature limiting device
5.2 General without automatic reconnection, and with the sensing
device installed as close as possible to the heating elements
5.2.1 Heating elements are to be enclosed and protected and permanently submerged in the liquid.
with metal or refractory material.
5.6 Water heaters
5.2.2 The terminals of the power supply cable are not to be
subjected to a higher temperature than that permitted for 5.6.1 Water heaters are to be provided with a thermostat
the conductor of the connection cable. and safety temperature limiter.

April 2007 Bureau Veritas 71

Pt C, Ch 2, Sec 11

SECTION 11 LOCATION

1 General 2.2.5 The main switchboard is to be located as close as

practicable to the main generating station, within the same
machinery space and the same vertical and horizontal A60
1.1 Location fire boundaries.

1.1.1 The degree of protection of the enclosures and the 2.2.6 Where essential services for steering and propulsion
environmental categories of the equipment are to be appro- are supplied from section boards, these and any transform-
priate to the spaces or areas in which they are located; see ers, convertors and similar appliances constituting an essen-
Ch 2, Sec 3, Tab 2, Ch 2, Sec 3, Tab 3 and Ch 2, Sec 2, tial part of the electrical supply system are also to satisfy the
[5.2.2]. above provisions.

2.2.7 A non-required subdivision bulkhead, with sufficient

1.2 Areas with a risk of explosion access, located between the switchboard and generators, or
between two or more generators, is not to be considered as
1.2.1 Except where the installation of equipment for explo- separating the equipment.
sive gas atmosphere is provided for by the Rules, electrical
equipment is not to be installed where flammable gases or 3 Emergency electrical system
vapours are liable to accumulate; see Ch 2, Sec 3, [10].
3.1 Spaces for the emergency source
2 Main electrical system
3.1.1 The emergency source of electrical power, associated
transforming equipment, if any, transitional source of emer-
2.1 Location in relation to the emergency gency power, emergency switchboard and emergency light-
system ing switchboard shall be located above the uppermost
continuous deck and shall be readily accessible from the
2.1.1 The arrangement of the emergency electrical system open deck.
is to be such that a fire or other casualty in spaces contain- They shall not be located forward of the collision bulkhead.
ing the emergency source of electrical power, associated
converting equipment, if any, the emergency switchboard 3.1.2 The spaces containing the emergency source of elec-
and the emergency lighting switchboard will not render trical power, associated transforming equipment, if any, the
inoperative the main electric lighting system and the other transitional source of emergency electrical power and the
primary essential services. emergency switchboard are not to be contiguous to the
boundaries of machinery spaces of Category A or those
spaces containing the main source of electrical power, asso-
2.2 Main switchboard ciated transforming equipment, if any, and the main switch-
board.
2.2.1 The main switchboard shall be so placed relative to Where this is not practicable, the contiguous boundaries
one main generating station that, as far as is practicable, the are to be Class A60.
integrity of the normal electrical supply may be affected
only by a fire or other casualty in one space.
3.2 Location in relation to the main electri-
cal system
2.2.2 An environmental enclosure for the main switchboard,
such as may be provided by a machinery control room situ- 3.2.1 The location of the emergency source of electrical
ated within the main boundaries of the space, is not to be power, associated transforming equipment, if any, the transi-
considered as separating switchboards from generators. tional source of emergency power, the emergency switch-
board and the emergency lighting switchboard in relation to
2.2.3 The main generating station is to be situated within the main source of electrical power, associated transforming
the machinery space, i.e. within the extreme main trans- equipment, if any, and the main switchboard shall be such
verse watertight bulkheads. as to ensure to the satisfaction of the Society that a fire or
other casualty in the space containing the main source of
2.2.4 Any bulkhead between the extreme main transverse electrical power, associated transforming equipment, if any,
watertight bulkheads is not regarded as separating the and the main switchboard or in any machinery space of
equipment in the main generating station provided that Category A will not interfere with the supply, control and
there is access between the spaces. distribution of emergency electrical power.

72 Bureau Veritas April 2007

 Pt C, Ch 2, Sec 11

3.2.2 The arrangement of the main electrical system is to 5.1.4 Cables are generally not to be installed across expan-
be such that a fire or other casualty in spaces containing the sion joints.
main source of electrical power, associated converting Where this is unavoidable, however, a loop of cable of
equipment, if any, the main switchboard and the main light- length proportional to the expansion of the joint is to be
ing switchboard will not render inoperative the emergency provided (see Ch 2, Sec 12, [7.2.2]).
electric lighting system and the other emergency services
other than those located within the spaces where the fire or 5.2 Location of cables in relation to the risk
casualty has occurred.
of fire and overheating
3.3 Emergency switchboard 5.2.1 Cables and wiring serving essential or emergency
power, lighting, internal communications or signals are, so
3.3.1 The emergency switchboard shall be installed as near far as is practicable, to be routed clear of galleys, laundries,
as is practicable to the emergency source of electrical machinery spaces of Category A and their casings and other
power. high fire risk areas, except for supplying equipment in those
spaces.
3.3.2 Where the emergency source of electrical power is a
generator, the emergency switchboard shall be located in 5.2.2 When it is essential that a circuit functions for some
the same space unless the operation of the emergency time during a fire and it is unavoidable to carry the cable for
switchboard would thereby be impaired. such a circuit through a high fire risk area (e.g. cables con-
necting fire pumps to the emergency switchboard), the
3.4 Emergency battery cable is to be of a fire-resistant type or adequately protected
against direct exposure to fire.
3.4.1 No accumulator battery fitted in accordance with the
provisions of Ch 2, Sec 3, [2.3] shall be installed in the same 5.2.3 Main cable runs (see Note 1) and cables for the sup-
space as the emergency switchboard. ply and control of essential services are, as far as is practica-
ble, to be kept away from machinery parts having an
3.4.2 For ships not subject to Solas, accumulator batteries increased fire risk (see Note 2) unless:
fitted in accordance with the provisions of Ch 2, Sec 3, • the cables have to be connected to the subject equipment
[2.3] and connected to a charging device of power of 2 kW
• the cables are protected by a steel bulkhead or deck, or
or less may be accepted in the same space as the emer-
gency switchboard but outside the emergency switchboard • the cables in that area are of the fire-resisting type.
to the satisfaction of the Society. Note 1: Main cable runs are for example:
• cable runs from generators and propulsion motors to main and
4 Distribution boards emergency switchboards
• cable runs directly above or below main and emergency switch-
boards, centralised motor starter panels, section boards and cen-
4.1 Distribution boards for cargo spaces
tralised control panels for propulsion and essential auxiliaries.
and similar spaces
Note 2: Machinery, machinery parts or equipment handling com-
bustibles are considered to present an increased fire risk.
4.1.1 Distribution boards containing multipole switches for
the control of power and lighting circuits in bunkers and 5.2.4 Cables and wiring serving essential or emergency
cargo spaces are to be situated outside such spaces. power, lighting, internal communications or signals are to be
arranged, as far as practicable, in such a manner as to pre-
4.2 Distribution board for navigation lights clude their being rendered unserviceable by heating of the
bulkheads that may be caused by a fire in an adjacent space.
4.2.1 The distribution board for navigation lights is to be
placed in an accessible position on the bridge. 5.2.5 Cables are to be arranged as remote as possible from
sources of heat such as hot pipes, resistors, etc. Where
5 Cable runs installation of cables near heat sources cannot be avoided,
and where there is consequently a risk of damage to the
cables by heat, suitable shields are to be installed, or other
5.1 General precautions to avoid overheating are to be taken, for exam-
ple use of ventilation, heat insulation materials or special
5.1.1 Cable runs are to be selected so as to be as far as
heat-resisting cables.
practicable accessible, with the exception of single cables,
situated behind walls or ceilings constructed of incombusti-
ble materials, supplying lighting fittings and socket-outlets 5.3 Location of cables in relation to electro-
in accommodation spaces, or cables enclosed in pipes or magnetic interference
conduits for installation purposes.
5.3.1 For the installation of cables in the vicinity of radio
5.1.2 Cable runs are to be selected so as to avoid action equipment or of cables belonging to electronic control and
from condensed moisture and from dripping of liquids. monitoring systems, steps are to be taken in order to limit
the effects of unwanted electromagnetic interference (see
5.1.3 Connection and draw boxes are to be accessible. Ch 3, Sec 5).

April 2007 Bureau Veritas 73

Pt C, Ch 2, Sec 11

5.4 Services with a duplicate feeder 6.2.3 The provisions of [6.2.1] and [6.2.2] also apply to
several batteries connected to charging devices of total
5.4.1 In the case of essential services requiring a duplicate power exceeding 2 kW calculated for each one as stated in
supply (e.g. steering gear circuits), the supply and associ- [6.2.1].
ated control cables are to follow different routes which are
to be as far apart as practicable, separated both vertically
6.3 Moderate vented batteries
and horizontally.
6.3.1 Batteries connected to a charging device of power
5.5 Emergency circuits between 0,2 kW and 2 kW calculated as stated in [6.2.1]
(hereafter referred to as "moderate batteries") are to be
5.5.1 Cables supplying emergency circuits are not to run arranged in the same manner as large batteries or placed in
through spaces containing the main source of electrical a box or locker in suitable locations such as machinery
power, associated transforming equipment, if any, the main spaces, storerooms or similar spaces. In machinery spaces
switchboard and the main lighting switchboard, except for and similar well-ventilated compartments, these batteries
cables supplying emergency equipment located within such may be installed without a box or locker provided they are
spaces (see [3.2.2]). protected from falling objects, dripping water and conden-
sation where necessary.
5.6 Electrical distribution in passenger ships
6.3.2 Rooms, lockers or boxes assigned to moderate batter-
5.6.1 For the electrical distribution in passenger ships, see ies are to be provided with natural ventilation or mechani-
Pt D, Ch 11, Sec 5, [1.2]. cal exhaust ventilation, except for batteries installed
without a box or locker (located open) in well-ventilated
6 Storage batteries spaces.

6.3.3 The provisions of [6.3.1] and [6.3.2] also apply to

6.1 General several batteries connected to charging devices of total
6.1.1 Batteries are to be located where they are not power between 0,2 kW and 2 kW calculated for each one
exposed to excessive heat, extreme cold, spray, steam or as stated in [6.2.1].
other conditions which would impair performance or accel-
erate deterioration. They are to be installed in such a way 6.4 Small vented batteries
that no damage may be caused to surrounding appliances
by the vapours generated. 6.4.1 Batteries connected to a charging device of power
less than 0,2 kW calculated as stated in [6.2.1] (hereafter
6.1.2 Storage batteries are to be suitably housed, and com- referred to as "small batteries") are to be arranged in the
partments (rooms, lockers or boxes) used primarily for their same manner as moderate or large batteries, or without a
accommodation are to be properly constructed and efficiently box or locker, provided they are protected from falling
ventilated so as to prevent accumulation of flammable gas. objects, or in a box in a ventilated area.

6.1.3 Starter batteries are to be located as close as practica- 6.4.2 Boxes for small batteries may be ventilated only by
ble to the engine or engines served. means of openings near the top to permit escape of gas.
6.1.4 Accumulator batteries shall not be located in sleeping
quarters except where hermetically sealed to the satisfaction 6.5 Ventilation
of the Society.
6.5.1 The ventilation of battery compartments is to be inde-
6.1.5 Lead-acid batteries and alkaline batteries are not to pendent of ventilation systems for other spaces.
be installed in the same compartment (room, locker, box),
unless of valve-regulated sealed type. 6.5.2 The quantity of air expelled (by natural or forced ven-
tilation) for compartments containing vented type batteries
is to be at least equal to:
6.2 Large vented batteries
Q = 110 I n
6.2.1 Batteries connected to a charging device of power where:
exceeding 2 kW, calculated from the maximum obtainable
charging current and the nominal voltage of the battery Q : Quantity of air expelled, in litres per hour
(hereafter referred to as "large batteries") are to be installed I : Maximum current delivered by the charging
in a room assigned to batteries only. equipment during gas formation, but not less
Where this is not possible, they may be arranged in a suita- than one quarter of the maximum obtainable
ble locker on deck. charging current in amperes
n : Number of cells in series.
6.2.2 Rooms assigned to large batteries are to be provided
with mechanical exhaust ventilation. 6.5.3 The quantity of air expelled (by natural or forced ven-
Natural ventilation may be employed for boxes located on tilation) for compartments containing valve-regulated
open deck. sealed batteries is to be at least 25% of that given in [6.5.2].

74 Bureau Veritas April 2007

 Pt C, Ch 2, Sec 11

6.5.4 Ducts are to be made of a corrosion-resisting material 6.5.7 In mechanical exhaust ventilation systems:
or their interior surfaces are to be painted with corrosion- a) electric motors are to be outside the exhaust ducts and
resistant paint. battery compartment and are to be of safe type if
installed within 3 m from the exhaust of the ventilation
6.5.5 Adequate air inlets (whether connected to ducts or duct
not) are to be provided near the floor of battery rooms or the
b) fans are to be so constructed and of a material such as to
bottom of lockers or boxes (except for that of small batter-
render sparking impossible in the event of the impeller
ies).
touching the fan casing
Air inlet may be from the open air or from another space c) steel or aluminium impellers are not to be used
(for example from machinery spaces). d) the system is to be interlocked with the charging device
so that the battery cannot be charged without ventila-
6.5.6 Exhaust ducts of natural ventilation systems: tion (trickle charge may be maintained)
a) are to be run directly from the top of the compartment e) a temperature sensor is to be located in the battery com-
to the open air above (they may terminate in the open or partment to monitor the correct behaviour of the battery
in well-ventilated spaces) in cases where the battery element is sensitive to tem-
perature.
b) are to terminate not less than 90 cm above the top of the
battery compartment 6.5.8 For natural ventilation systems for deck boxes:
a) holes for air inlet are to be provided on at least two
c) are to have no part more than 45° from the vertical
opposite sides of the box
d) are not to contain appliances (for example for barring b) the exhaust duct is to be of ample dimensions
flames) which may impede the free passage of air or gas c) the duct is to terminate at least 1,25 m above the box in
mixtures. a goose-neck or mushroom-head or the equivalent
Where natural ventilation is impracticable or insufficient, d) the degree of protection is to be in accordance with Ch 2,
mechanical exhaust ventilation is to be provided. Sec 3, Tab 2.

April 2007 Bureau Veritas 75

Pt C, Ch 2, Sec 12

SECTION 12 INSTALLATION

1 General a) the equipment is not for use for emergency services

b) temperature control is achieved by at least two cooling
1.1 Protection against injury or damage units so arranged that in the event of loss of one cooling
caused by electrical equipment unit, for any reason, the remaining unit(s) is capable of
staisfactorily maintaining the design temperature
1.1.1 All electrical equipment is to be so installed as not to c) the equipment is able to be initially set to work safety
cause injury when handled or touched in the normal manner. within a 45°C ambient temperature until such a time
that the lesser ambient temperature may be achieved;
1.1.2 All electrical equipment is to be installed in such a the cooling equipment is to be rated for a 45°C ambient
way that live parts cannot be inadvertently touched, unless temperature
supplied at a safety voltage.
d) audible and visual alarms are provided, at a continually
1.1.3 For protective earthing as a precaution against indi- manned control station, to indicate any malfunction of
rect contact, see [2]. the cooling units.

1.1.4 Equipment is to be installed so as not to cause, or at 1.4.2 In accepting a lesser ambient temperature than 45°C,
least so as to reduce to a minimum, electromagnetic inter- it is to be ensured that electrical cables for their entire
ference. length are adequately rated for the maximum ambient tem-
perature to which they are exposed along their length.

1.2 Protection against damage to electrical

equipment 2 Earthing of non-current carrying
parts
1.2.1 Electrical equipment is to be so placed that as far as
practicable it is not exposed to risk of damage from water, 2.1 Parts which are to be earthed
steam, oil or oil vapours.
2.1.1 Exposed metal parts of both fixed and portable elec-
1.2.2 The air supply for internal ventilation of electrical trical machines or equipment which are not intended to be
equipment is to be as clean and dry as practicable; cooling live but which are liable under fault conditions to become
air for internal ventilation is not to be drawn from below the live and similar metal parts inside non-metallic enclosures
floor plates in engine and/or boiler rooms. are to be earthed unless the machines or equipment are:

1.2.3 Equipment is to be so mounted that its enclosing a) supplied at a voltage not exceeding 50 V direct current
arrangements and the functioning of the built-in equipment or 50 V, root mean square between conductors,
will not be affected by distortions, vibrations and movements achieved without the use of auto-transformers (safety
of the ship’s structure or by other damage liable to occur. voltage); or
b) supplied at a voltage not exceeding 250 V by safety iso-
1.2.4 If electrical fittings, not of aluminium, are attached to lating transformers supplying one consuming device
aluminium, suitable provision is to be made to prevent gal- only; or
vanic corrosion.
c) constructed in accordance with the principle of double
insulation.
1.3 Accessibility
2.1.2 To minimise shock from high frequency voltage
1.3.1 Equipment is to be so installed that sufficient space is induced by the radio transmitter, handles, handrails and
available for inspection and maintenance as required for all other metal elements on the bridge or upper decks are to be
its parts (see [6.1.3]). in electrical connection with the hull or superstructures.

1.4 Electrical equipment in environmentally 2.2 Methods of earthing

controlled spaces
2.2.1 Metal frames or enclosures of apparatus and electri-
1.4.1 Where electrical equipment is installed within envi- cal machinery may be fixed to, and in metallic contact
ronmentally controlled space the ambient temperature for with, the ship’s structure, provided that the surfaces in con-
which the equipment is to be suitable may be reduced from tact are clean and free from rust, scale or paint when
45°C and maintained at a value not less than 35°C provided: installed and are firmly bolted together.

76 Bureau Veritas April 2007

 Pt C, Ch 2, Sec 12

2.2.2 For metal frames or enclosures which are not earthed 2.4 Connection to the ship’s structure
as specified in [2.2.1], earthing connections complying
with [2.3] and [2.4] are to be used. 2.4.1 Every connection of an earth-continuity conductor or
earthing lead to the ship’s structure is to be secured by
2.2.3 For requirements regarding the earthing of coverings means of a screw of brass or other corrosion-resistant mate-
of cables and the mechanical protection of cables, see rial of diameter not less than 6 mm.
[7.11] and [7.12].
2.4.2 Such earthing connection is not to be used for other
purposes.
2.3 Earthing connections
2.4.3 The connection described in [2.4.1] is to be located
2.3.1 Every earthing connection is to be of copper or other in an accessible position where it may readily be checked.
corrosion-resistant material and is to be securely installed
and protected, where necessary, against damage and elec-
trolytic corrosion. 2.5 Earthed distribution systems

2.3.2 The nominal cross-sectional area of each copper 2.5.1 The system earthing of earthed distribution systems is
earthing connection is to be not less than that required in to be effected by means independent of any earthing
Tab 1. arrangements of non-current carrying parts and is to be con-
nected to the hull at one point only.
Earthing connections of other metals are to have conduct-
ance at least equal to that specified for a copper earthing 2.5.2 In an earthed distribution system in which the earth-
connection. ing connection does not normally carry current, this con-
nection is to conform with the requirements of [2.3], except
2.3.3 Metal parts of portable appliances are to be earthed, that the lower limit of 70 mm2 does not apply (see Tab 1).
where required (see [2.1.1]), by means of an earth-continu-
ity conductor in the flexible supply cable or cord, which 2.5.3 In a distribution system with hull return, the system
has the cross-sectional area specified in Tab 1 and which is earthing connection is to have at least the same cross-sec-
earthed, for example, through the associated plug and tional area as the feeder lines.
socket.
2.5.4 The earthing connection is to be in an accessible
2.3.4 In no circumstances is the lead sheathing or armour position where it may readily be inspected and discon-
of cables to be relied upon as the sole means of earthing. nected for insulation testing.

Table 1 : Cross-sectional area of earth-continuity conductors and earthing connections

Cross-sectional area
Type of earthing connection of associated current Minimum cross-sectional area of copper earthing connection
carrying conductor
1 Earth-continuity any Same as current carrying conductor up to and including 16 mm2 and one half
conductor in flexible above 16 mm2 but at least 16 mm2
cable or flexible cord
2 Earth-continuity any a) for cables having an insulated earth-continuity conductor
conductor • a cross-section equal to the main conductors up to and including
incorporated in fixed 16 mm2, but minimum 1,5 mm2
cable
• a cross-section not less than 50% of the cross-section of the main
conductor when the latter is more than 16 mm2, but at least 16 mm2
b) for cables with a bare earth wire in direct contact with the lead sheath
Cross-section of main conductor, Earthing connection,
in mm2 in mm2
1 ÷ 2,5 1
4÷6 1,5
3 Separate fixed ≤ 2,5 mm2 Same as current carrying conductor subject to minimum of 1,5 mm2 for
earthing conductor stranded earthing connection or 2,5 mm2 for unstranded earthing connection
> 2,5 mm2 but One half the cross-sectional area of the current carrying conductor, subjected
≤ 120 mm2 to a minimum of 4 mm2
> 120 mm2 70 mm2

April 2007 Bureau Veritas 77

Pt C, Ch 2, Sec 12

2.6 Aluminium superstructures 5.2.2 Interior surfaces of metal shelves for battery cells,
whether or not grouped in crates or trays, are to be pro-
2.6.1 When aluminium superstructures are insulated from tected by a lining of electrolyte-resistant material, watertight
the steel hull to prevent electrolytic corrosion, they are to and carried up to at least 75 mm on all sides. In particular,
be secured to the hull by means of a separate bonding con- linings are to have a minimum thickness of 1,5 mm, if of
nection. lead sheet for lead-acid batteries, and of 0,8 mm, if of steel
for alkaline batteries.
2.6.2 The connections are to be adequately close together
and are to have a resistance less than 0,1 Ω. Alternatively, the floor of the room or locker is to be lined as
specified above to a height of at least 150 mm.
2.6.3 The connections are to be located where they may
readily be inspected. 5.2.3 Battery boxes are to be lined in accordance with
[5.2.2] to a height of at least 75 mm.
3 Rotating machines
6 Switchgear and controlgear assemblies
3.1
6.1 Main switchboard
3.1.1 Every rotating machine is preferably to be installed
with the shaft in the fore-and-aft direction. Where a rotating 6.1.1 The main switchboard is to be so arranged as to give
machine of 100 kW and over is installed athwartship, or easy access as may be needed to apparatus and equipment,
vertically, it is to be ensured that the design of the bearings without danger to personnel.
and the arrangements for lubrication are satisfactory to
withstand the rolling specified in Ch 2, Sec 2, Tab 4. 6.1.2 An unobstructed space is to be left in front of the
switchboard wide enough to allow access for operation;
4 Semiconductor convertors such width is generally about 1 metre.
When withdrawable equipment is contained in the switch-
4.1 Semiconductor power convertors board, the width of the space is to be not less than 0,5 m
when the equipment is fully withdrawn.
4.1.1 Naturally air-cooled semiconductor convertors are to
Reduced widths may be considered for small ships.
be installed such that the circulation of air to and from the
stacks or enclosures is not impeded and that the tempera-
6.1.3 Where necessary, an unobstructed space is to be pro-
ture of the cooling inlet air to convertor stacks does not
vided at the rear of the switchboard ample to permit main-
exceed the ambient temperature for which the stacks are
tenance; in general, the width of this passage is to be not
specified.
less than 0,6 m, except that this may be reduced to 0,5 m in
way of stiffeners and frames, and the height sufficient for the
5 Vented type storage batteries operation foreseen.

5.1 General 6.1.4 Where the switchboard is open at the rear, the rear
space in [6.1.3] is to form a locked space provided at each
5.1.1 Batteries are to be arranged so that each cell or crate end with an access door. The required IP protection for the
of cells is accessible from the top and at least one side to corresponding location is to be fulfilled.
permit replacement and periodical maintenance.
6.1.5 If necessary, the clear height above the switchboard
5.1.2 Cells or crates are to be carried on insulating supports specified by the manufacturer is to be maintained for pres-
of material non-absorbent to the electrolyte (e.g. treated sure relief in the event of a short-circuit.
wood).
6.1.6 When the voltage exceeds the safety voltage, non-
5.1.3 Cells are to be securely chocked by means of insulat- conducting mats or gratings are to be provided at the front
ing material non-absorbent to the electrolyte, e.g. strips of and rear of the switchboard as necessary.
treated wood. Special mechanical precautions are to be
taken to prevent the emergency battery from being dam- 6.1.7 Piping and conduits are not to be installed directly
aged by the shock due to a collision. above or in the vicinity of switchboards.

5.1.4 Provision is to be made for the free circulation of air. Where this is unavoidable, pipes and conduits are to have
welded joints only or to be provided with protection against
spray from steam or pressurised liquids or dripping.
5.2 Protection against corrosion
5.2.1 The interior of battery compartments (rooms, lockers, 6.2 Emergency switchboard
boxes) including all metal parts subject to the electrolyte is
to be protected against the deteriorating effect of the latter 6.2.1 For the installation of the emergency switchboard, the
by electrolyte-resistant coating or other equivalent means, same requirements apply as given in [6.1] for the installa-
unless corrosion-resistant materials are used. tion of the main switchboard.

78 Bureau Veritas April 2007

 Pt C, Ch 2, Sec 12

6.3 Section boards and distribution boards b) the use of fire stops having at least B0 penetrations fitted
as follows (see Fig 1, Fig 2, Fig 3 and Fig 4):
6.3.1 For the installation of section and distribution boards, • cable entries at the main and emergency switchboard
the same requirements apply, as far as applicable, as given
• where cables enter engine control rooms
in [6.1] for the installation of the main switchboard.
• cable entries at centralised control panels for pro-
pulsion machinery and essential auxiliaries
7 Cables
• at each end of totally enclosed cable trunks
• at every second deck or approximately 6 metres for
7.1 General verticals runs and every 14 metres for horizontal
runs in enclosed and semi-enclosed spaces
7.1.1 Cables having insulating materials with different
maximum permissible conductor temperatures are not to be • at the boundaries of the spaces in cargo areas.
bunched together.
Figure 1 : Totally enclosed trunks
Where this is not practicable, the cables are to be so
installed that no cable reaches a temperature higher than its
rating.

7.1.2 Cables having a protective covering which may dam-

age the covering of more vulnerable cables are not to be
BO Penetration
bunched with the latter.

7.1.3 Cables having a bare metallic sheath (e.g. of copper)

or braid or armour are to be installed in such a way that gal-
vanic corrosion by contact with other metals is prevented.

7.1.4 All cables and wiring external to equipment are to be

so installed as not to impair their original flame-retarding
BO Penetration
properties.
To this end, the following methods may be used:
a) the use of cables which have been tested in accordance
with IEC Publication 332-3 Category A or an equivalent
test procedure for cables installed in bunches, or

Figure 2 : Non-totally enclosed trunks, vertical

a
A

2a

Fire stop with steel plate and

6m BO penetration

a B

2a

2a

April 2007 Bureau Veritas 79

Pt C, Ch 2, Sec 12

Figure 3 : Non-totally enclosed trunks, horizontal

Steel plate

14 m

BO BO
Penetration Penetration

DECK DECK

a Steel plate

1a
c) the use of fire protection coating applied to at least 1 7.2.2 Where the installation of cables across expansion
metre in every 14 metres on horizontal cable runs and joints is unavoidable, the minimum internal radius of the
over the entire length of vertical cable runs for cables loop at the end of the travel of the expansion joint is to be
installed in enclosed and semi-enclosed spaces. not less than 12 times the external diameter of the cable.
The cable penetrations are to be installed in steel plates of
at least 3 mm thickness extending all around to twice the
7.3 Fixing of cables
largest dimension of the cable run for vertical runs and once
for horizontal runs, but need not extend through ceilings,
decks, bulkheads or solid sides of trunks. These precautions 7.3.1 Cables shall be installed and supported in such a
apply in particular to bunches of 5 or more cables in areas manner as to avoid chafing or other damage.
with a high fire risk (such as Category A machinery spaces,
galleys etc.) and to bunches of more than 10 cables in other 7.3.2 The supports (tray plates, separate support brackets or
areas. hanger ladders) and the corresponding accessories are to be
of robust construction and of corrosion-resistant material or
7.2 Radius of bend suitably treated before erection to resist corrosion.

When cables are installed directly on aluminium structures,

7.2.1 The internal radius of bend for the installation of
fixing devices of aluminium or suitably treated steel are to
cables is to be chosen according to the type of cable as rec-
be used.
ommended by the manufacturer.
Its value is generally to be not less than the figure given in For mineral-insulated cables with copper sheath, fixing
Tab 2. devices in contact with the sheath are to be of copper alloy.

Table 2 : Bending radii

Cable construction Overall diameter of Minimum internal

Insulation Outer covering cable (D) radius of bend

Thermoplastic or thermosetting with Unarmoured ≤ 25 mm 4D

circular copper conductors or unbraided > 25 mm 6D
Metal braid screened or armoured Any 6D
Metal wire armoured Any 6D
Metal tape armoured or metal-sheathed
Composite polyester/metal laminate tape Any 8D
screened units or collective tape screening
Thermoplastic or thermosetting with Any Any 8D
shaped copper conductors

80 Bureau Veritas April 2007

 Pt C, Ch 2, Sec 12

Figure 4 : Open cables runs

Vertical

or

2a

2a 2a a 2a
FIRE STOP

Coating Entire Length

6m

FIRE STOP

Steel plate
BO Penetration

Horizontal

14m Steel plate

1a
a
1a
1a FIRE STOP
BO Penetration

1a

14m
1m 1m

Coating Coating

April 2007 Bureau Veritas 81

Pt C, Ch 2, Sec 12

7.3.3 With the exception of cables installed in pipes, con- 7.5.4 Where cables pass through bulkheads or decks sepa-
duits, trunkings or special casings, cables are to be fixed by rating areas with a risk of explosion, arrangements are to be
means of clips, saddles or straps of suitable material, in order such that hazardous gas or dust cannot penetrate through
to tighten the cables without their coverings being damaged. openings for the passage of cables into other areas.

7.3.4 Cable clips or straps made from a material other than 7.5.5 Where cables pass through a bulkhead or deck which
metal are to be manufactured of a flame-retardant material. is required to have some degree of fire integrity, penetration
is to be so effected as to ensure that the required degree of
7.3.5 The distances between fastenings and between sup- fire integrity is not impaired.
ports are to be suitably chosen according to the type and
number of cables and the probability of vibration.
7.6 Expansion joints
7.3.6 When cables are fixed by means of clips or straps
7.6.1 If there is reason to fear that a tray plate, pipe or con-
made from a material other than metal and these cables are
duit may break because of the motion of the ship, different
not laid on top of horizontal cable supports (e.g. in the case
load conditions and temperature variations, appropriate
of vertical installation), suitable metal clips or saddles
expansion joints are to be provided.
spaced not more than 1 metre apart are to be used in addi-
tion in order to prevent the release of cables during a fire. This may apply in particular in the case of cable runs on the
weather deck.
7.3.7 Suspended cables of fire-resisting type are to be fixed
by means of steel straps spaced not more than 500 mm apart. 7.7 Cables in closed pipes or conduits

7.4 Mechanical protection 7.7.1 Closed pipes or conduits are to have such internal
dimensions and radius of bend as will permit the easy draw-
7.4.1 Cables exposed to risk of mechanical damage are to ing in and out of the cables which they are to contain; the
be protected by metal casing, profiles or grids or enclosed in internal radius of bend is to be not less than that permitted
metal pipes or conduits, unless the cable covering (e.g. for cables and, for pipes exceeding 63 mm external diame-
armour or sheath) provides adequate mechanical protection. ter, not less than twice the external diameter of the pipe
where this value is greater.
7.4.2 In situations where there would be an exceptional
risk of mechanical damage, e.g. in holds, storage spaces, 7.7.2 Closed pipes and conduits are to be suitably smooth
cargo spaces, etc., cables are to be protected by metal cas- on the interior and are to have their ends shaped or bushed
ing, trunkings or conduits, even when armoured, if the in such a way as not to damage the cable covering.
ship’s structure or attached parts do not afford sufficient pro-
tection for the cables. 7.7.3 The space factor (ratio of the sum of the cross-sec-
tional areas corresponding to the external diameters of the
7.4.3 For the protection of cables passing through decks, cables to the internal cross-sectional areas of the pipe or
see [7.5.3]. conduit) is to be not greater than 0,4.

7.4.4 Metal casing used for mechanical protection of 7.7.4 If necessary, openings are to be provided at the high-
cables is to be effectively protected against corrosion. est and lowest points so as to permit air circulation and
ensure that the heat from the cables can be dissipated, and
to obviate the possibility of water accumulating at any part
7.5 Penetrations of bulkheads and decks of the pipe or conduit.
7.5.1 If cables have to pass without adequate support
7.7.5 Vertical trunking for electrical cables is to be so con-
through non-watertight bulkheads and generally through
structed as not to jeopardise the required passive fire pro-
holes drilled in sheets of structural steel, these holes are to
tection between the spaces.
be fitted with glands or bushings of suitable material.
7.7.6 Metal pipes or conduits are to be protected against
7.5.2 If cables have to pass through a watertight bulkhead
corrosion.
or deck, the penetration is to be effected in a watertight
manner. 7.7.7 Non-metallic pipes or conduits are to be flame-
Either suitable individual watertight glands for single cables retardant.
or boxes containing several cables and filled with a flame-
retardant packing may be used for this purpose. 7.8 Cables in casings or trunking and con-
Whichever type of penetration is used, the watertight integ- duits with removable covers
rity of the bulkheads or deck is to be maintained.
7.8.1 Covers are to be removable and when they are open,
7.5.3 Cables passing through decks and continuing verti- cables are to be accessible.
cally are to be protected against mechanical damage to a
height of at least 200 mm above the deck. 7.8.2 Materials used are to comply with [7.7.6] and [7.7.7].

82 Bureau Veritas April 2007

 Pt C, Ch 2, Sec 12

7.8.3 If the fixing of covers is by means of screws, the latter 7.11.5 Metal coverings of single-core a.c. cables and spe-
are to be of non-rusting material and arranged so as not to cial d.c. cables with high "ripple" content (e.g. for thyristor
damage the cables. equipment) are to be earthed at one point only (e.g. at the
mid-point).
7.8.4 Means are to be provided to ensure that the heat from
the cables can be dissipated and water accumulation is 7.11.6 The electrical continuity of all metal coverings of
avoided (see [7.7.4]). cables throughout the length of the latter, particularly at
joints and tappings, is to be ensured.
7.9 Cable ends 7.11.7 The metal covering of cables may be earthed by
means of glands intended for the purpose and so designed
7.9.1 Terminations in all conductors are to be so made as
as to ensure an effective earth connection.
to retain the original electrical, mechanical, flame-retarding
The glands are to be firmly attached to, and in effective
properties of the cable.
electrical contact with, a metal structure earthed in accord-
7.9.2 Where mechanical clamps are not used, the ends of ance with these requirements.
all conductors having a cross-sectional area greater than 4
7.11.8 The metal covering of cables may also be earthed by
mm2 are to be fitted with soldering sockets or compression-
means of clamps or clips of corrosion-resistant material
type sockets of sufficient size to contain all the strands of
making effective contact with the covering and earthed
the conductor.
metal.
7.9.3 Cables not having a moisture-resistant insulation (e.g.
mineral-insulated) are to have their ends effectively sealed 7.12 Earthing and continuity of metal pipes,
against ingress of moisture. conduits and trunking or casings
7.12.1 Metal casings, pipes, conduits and trunking are to
7.10 Joints and tappings (branch circuit) be effectively earthed.
7.10.1 Cable runs are normally not to include joints. 7.12.2 Pipes or conduits may be earthed by being screwed
Where absolutely necessary, cable joints are to be carried into a metal enclosure, or by nuts on both sides of the wall
out by a junction method with rebuilding of the insulation of a metallic enclosure, provided the surfaces in contact are
and protective coverings. clean and free from rust, scale or paint and that the enclo-
sure is in accordance with these requirements on earthing.
7.10.2 Joints in all conductors are to be so made as to
The connection is to be painted immediately after assembly
retain the original electrical (continuity and isolation),
in order to inhibit corrosion.
mechanical (strength and protection), flame-retarding and,
where necessary, fire-resisting properties of the cable. 7.12.3 Pipes and conduits may be earthed by means of
clamps or clips of corrosion-resistant metal making effective
7.10.3 Tappings (branch circuits) are to be made via suita- contact with the earthed metal.
ble connections or in suitable boxes of such design that the
conductors remain adequately insulated and protected from 7.12.4 Pipes, conduits or trunking together with connec-
atmospheric action and are fitted with terminals or busbars tion boxes of metallic material are to be electrically contin-
of dimensions appropriate to the current rating. uous.

7.10.4 Cables for safety voltages are not to terminate in the 7.12.5 All joints in metal pipes and conduits used for earth
same connection boxes as cable for higher voltages unless continuity are to be soundly made and protected, where
separated by suitable means. necessary, against corrosion.

7.12.6 Individual short lengths of pipes or conduits need

7.11 Earthing and continuity of metal cover- not be earthed.
ings of cables

7.11.1 All metal coverings of cables are to be electrically

7.13 Precautions for single-core cables for a.c.
connected to the metal hull of the ship. 7.13.1 For the earthing of metal coverings see [7.11.5].
7.11.2 Metal coverings are generally to be earthed at both 7.13.2 Where it is necessary to use single-core cables for
ends of the cable, except for [7.11.3] and [7.11.4]. alternating current circuits rated in excess of 20 A, the
requirements of [7.13.3] to [7.13.7] are to be complied
7.11.3 Single-point earthing is admitted for final sub-cir- with.
cuits (at the supply end), except for those circuits located in
areas with a risk of explosion. 7.13.3 Conductors belonging to the same circuit are to be
contained within the same pipe, conduit or trunking, unless
7.11.4 Earthing is to be at one end only in those installa- this is of non-magnetic material.
tions (mineral-insulated cables, intrinsically safe circuits,
control circuits (see Ch 3, Sec 5), etc.) where it is required 7.13.4 Cable clips are to include cables of all phases of a
for technical or safety reasons. circuit unless the clips are of non-magnetic material.

April 2007 Bureau Veritas 83

Pt C, Ch 2, Sec 12

7.13.5 In the installation of two, three or four single-core 7.17 Cables in the vicinity of radio equipment
cables forming respectively single-phase circuits, three-
phase circuits, or three-phase and neutral circuits, the 7.17.1 All cables between antennas and transmitters are to
cables are to be in contact with one another, as far as possi- be routed separately of any other cable.
ble. In any event, the distance between the external cover-
ing of two adjacent cables is to be not greater than one 7.17.2 Where it is necessary to use single-core cables, the
diameter. arrangement of conductors is to be such as to avoid com-
plete or partial loops.
7.13.6 When single-core cables having a current rating
greater than 250 A are installed near a steel bulkhead, the 7.18 Cables for submerged bilge pumps
clearance between the cables and the bulkhead is to be at
least 50 mm, unless the cables belonging to the same circuit 7.18.1 See Ch 2, Sec 3, [9.7].
are installed in trefoil twisted formation.
7.19 Cable trays/protective casings made of
7.13.7 Magnetic material is not to be used between single- plastics materials
core cables of a group. Where cables pass through steel
plates, all the conductors of the same circuit are to pass 7.19.1 Cable trays or protective casings made of plastics
through a plate or gland, so made that there is no magnetic materials (thermoplastic or thermosetting plastic material)
material between the cables, and the clearance between the are to be type tested.
cables and the magnetic material is to be no less than
75 mm, unless the cables belonging to the same circuit are 7.19.2 Cable trays/protective casings are to be supple-
installed in trefoil twisted formation. mented by metallic fixing and straps such that in the event
of a fire they, and the cables affixed, are prevented from fall-
ing and causing injury to personnel and/or an obstruction to
7.14 Cables in refrigerated spaces any escape route.
When used on open deck, they are to be protected against
7.14.1 For the types of cables permitted in refrigerated U.V. light.
spaces, see Ch 2, Sec 3, [9.4].
7.19.3 The load on the cable trays/ protective casings is to
7.14.2 Power cables installed in refrigerated spaces are not be within the Safe Working Load (SWL). The support spac-
to be covered by thermal insulation. Moreover, such cables ing is not to be greater than the manufacturer recommenda-
are not to be placed directly on the face of the refrigerated tions nor in excess of spacing at SWL test. In general, the
space unless they have a thermoplastic or elastomeric spacing is not to exceed 2 meters.
extruded sheath.
7.19.4 The selection and spacing of cable tray/protective
casing supports are to take into account:
7.14.3 Power cables entering a refrigerated space are to
pass through the walls and thermal insulation at right • cable trays/protective casings’ dimensions
angles, in tubes sealed at each end and protected against • mechanical and physical properties of their material
oxidation. • mass of cable trays/protective casings
• loads due weight of cables, external forces, thrust forces
7.15 Cables in areas with a risk of explosion and vibrations
• maximum accelerations to which the system may be
7.15.1 For the types of cables permitted in areas with a risk subjected
of explosion, see Ch 2, Sec 3, [10.2]. • combination of loads.

7.15.2 For penetration of bulkheads or decks separating 7.19.5 The sum of the cables total cross-sectional area,
areas with a risk of explosion, see [7.5.4]. based on the cables external diameter is not to exceed 40%
of the protective casing internal cross-sectional area. This
does not apply to a single cable in a protective casing.
7.15.3 Cables of intrinsically safe circuits are to be sepa-
rated from the cables of all other circuits (minimum
50 mm). 8 Various appliances

7.16 Cables and apparatus for services requi- 8.1 Lighting fittings
red to be operable under fire conditions 8.1.1 Lighting fittings are to be so arranged as to prevent
temperature rises which could damage the cables and wiring.
7.16.1 Cables and apparatus for services required to be Note 1: Where the temperature of terminals of lighting fittings
operable under fire conditions including their power sup- exceeds the maximum conductor temperature permitted for the
plies are to be so arranged that the loss of these services is supplied cable (see Ch 2, Sec 3, [9.9] ), special installation arrange-
minimized due to a localized fire at any one area or zone ments, such as terminal boxes thermally insulated from the light
listed in Ch 2, Sec 1, [3.25]. source, are to be provided.

84 Bureau Veritas April 2007

 Pt C, Ch 2, Sec 12

8.1.2 Lighting fittings are to be so arranged as to prevent 8.2.2 Space heaters are to be so installed that there is no
surrounding material from becoming excessively hot. risk of excessive heating of the bulkheads or decks on
which or next to which they are mounted.
8.1.3 Lighting fittings are to be secured in place such that
they cannot be displaced by the motion of the vessel.
8.2.3 Combustible materials in the vicinity of space heaters
8.1.4 Emergency lights are to be marked for easy identification. are to be protected by suitable incombustible and thermal-
insulating materials.
8.2 Heating appliances
8.2.1 Space heaters are to be so installed that clothing,
8.3 Heating cables and tapes or other heat-
bedding and other flammable material cannot come in con- ing elements
tact with them in such a manner as to cause risk of fire.
Note 1: To this end, for example, hooks or other devices for hang- 8.3.1 Heating cables and tapes or other heating elements
ing garments are not to be fitted above space heaters or, where are not to be installed in contact with combustible materials.
appropriate, a perforated plate of incombustible material is to be
mounted above each heater, slanted to prevent hanging anything Where they are installed close to such materials, they are to
on the heater itself. be separated by means of a non-flammable material.

April 2007 Bureau Veritas 85

Pt C, Ch 2, Sec 13

SECTION 13 HIGH VOLTAGE INSTALLATIONS

1 General 2.1.4 All earthing impedances are to be connected to the

hull. The connection to the hull is to be so arranged that any
circulating currents in the earth connections do not interfere
1.1 Field of application
with radio, radar, communication and control equipment
1.1.1 The following requirements apply to a.c. three-phase circuits.
systems with nominal voltage exceeding 1kV, the nominal
voltage being the voltage between phases. 2.1.5 In systems with neutral earthed, connection of the
neutral to the hull is to be provided for each section.
If not otherwise stated herein, construction and installation
applicable to low voltage equipment stated in Part C, Chap-
2.1.6 Alternators running in parallel may have a common
ter 2 generally apply to high voltage equipment.
neutral connection to earth provided they are suitably
designed to avoid excessive circulating currents.
1.2 Nominal system voltage
This is particularly important if the alternators are of differ-
1.2.1 The nominal system voltage is not to exceed 15 kV. ent size and make. Alternators in which the third harmonic
Note 1: Where necessary for special application, higher voltages content does not exceed 5% may be considered adequate.
may be accepted by the Society. Note 1: This would mostly occur with a neutral bus with a single
grounding resistor with the associated neutral switching. Where
1.3 High-voltage, low-voltage segregation individual resistors are used, circulation of the third harmonic cur-
rents between paralleled alternators is minimised.
1.3.1 Equipment with voltage above about 1 kV is not to be
installed in the same enclosure as low voltage equipment, 2.1.7 In systems with earthed neutral, resistors or other cur-
unless segregation or other suitable measures are taken to rent-limiting devices for the connection of the neutrals to
ensure that access to low voltage equipment is obtained the hull are to be provided for each section in which the
without danger. systems are split [2.1.2].

2 System design 2.2 Degrees of protection

2.1 Distribution 2.2.1 Each part of the electrical installation is to be pro-

vided with a degree of protection appropriate to the loca-
2.1.1 It is to be possible to split the main switchboard into tion, as a minimum the requirements of IEC Publication
at least two independent sections, by means of at least one 60092-201.
circuit breaker or other suitable disconnecting devices,
each supplied by at least one generator. If two separate 2.2.2 The degree of protection of enclosures of rotating
switchboards are provided and interconnected with cables, electrical machines is to be at least IP 23.
a circuit breaker is to be provided at each end of the cable. The degree of protection of terminals is to be at least IP 44.
Services which are duplicated are to be divided between
For motors installed in spaces accessible to unqualified per-
the sections.
sonnel, a degree of protection against approaching or con-
2.1.2 In the event of an earth fault, the current is not to be tact with live or moving parts of at least IP 4X is required.
greater than full load current of the largest generator on the
switch-board or relevant switchboard section and not less 2.2.3 The degree of protection of enclosures of transform-
than three times the minimum current required to operate ers is to be at least IP 23.
any device against earth fault. For transformers installed in spaces accessible to unquali-
It is to be assured that at least one source neutral to ground fied personnel, a degree of protection of at least IP 4X is
connection is available whenever the system is in the ener- required.
gised mode. Electrical equipment in directly earthed neutral
or other neutral earthed systems is to withstand the current For transformers not contained in enclosures, see [7.1].
due to a single phase fault against earth for the time neces-
sary to trip the protection device. 2.2.4 The degree of protection of metal enclosed switch-
gear, controlgear assemblies and static convertors is to be at
2.1.3 Means of disconnection are to be fitted in the neutral least IP 32. For switchgear, control gear assemblies and
earthing connection of each generator so that the generator static convertors installed in spaces accessible to unquali-
may be disconnected for maintenance and for insulation fied personnel, a degree of protection of at least IP 4X is
resistance measurement. required.

86 Bureau Veritas April 2007

 Pt C, Ch 2, Sec 13

2.3 Insulation When transformers are connected in parallel, tripping of the

protective devices on the primary side is to automatically
2.3.1 In general, for non type tested equipment phase-to- trip the switch connected on the secondary side.
phase air clearances and phase-to-earth air clearances
between non-insulated parts are to be not less than those 2.4.4 Voltage transformers are to be provided with over-
specified in Tab 1. load and short circuit protection on the secondary side.

Intermediate values may be accepted for nominal voltages, 2.4.5 Fuses are not to be used for overload protection.
provided that the next higher air clearance is observed.
2.4.6 Lower voltage systems supplied through transformers
In the case of smaller distances, an appropriate voltage
from high voltage systems are to be protected against over-
impulse test is to be applied.
voltages. This may be achieved by:
a) direct earthing of the lower voltage system
Table 1 : Minimum clearances
b) appropriate neutral voltage limiters
Rated voltage, in kV Minimum clearance, in mm c) earthed screen between the primary and secondary
3 - 3,3 55 windings of transformers.
6 - 6,6 90
10 - 11 120
3 Rotating machinery

2.3.2 Creepage distances between live parts and between 3.1 Stator windings of generators
live parts and earthed metal parts for standard components
are to be in accordance with relevant IEC Publications for 3.1.1 Generator stator windings are to have all phase ends
the nominal voltage of the system, the nature of the insula- brought out for the installation of the differential protection.
tion material and the transient overvoltage developed by
switch and fault conditions. 3.2 Temperature detectors
For non-standardised parts within the busbar section of a
3.2.1 Rotating machinery is to be provided with tempera-
switchgear assembly, the minimum creepage distance is to
ture detectors in its stator windings to actuate a visual and
be at least 25 mm/kV and behind current limiting devices,
audible alarm in a normally attended position whenever the
16 mm/kV.
temperature exceeds the permissible limit.
If embedded temperature detectors are used, means are to
2.4 Protection be provided to protect the circuit against overvoltage.

2.4.1 Protective devices are to be provided against phase-

to-phase faults in the cables connecting the generators to the 3.3 Tests
main switchboard and against interwinding faults within the
3.3.1 In addition to the tests normally required for rotating
generators. The protective devices are to trip the generator-
machinery, a high frequency high voltage test in accord-
circuit breaker and to automatically de-excite the generator.
ance with IEC Publication 60034-15 is to be carried out on
In distribution systems with a neutral earthed, phase-to- the individual coils in order to demonstrate a satisfactory
earth faults are also to be treated as above. withstand level of the inter-turn insulation to steep fronted
switching surges.
2.4.2 Any earth fault in the system is to be indicated by
means of a visual and audible alarm.
4 Power transformers
In low impedance or direct earthed systems provision is to
be made to automatically disconnect the faulty circuits. In
4.1 General
high impedance earthed systems, where outgoing feeders
will not be isolated in case of an earth fault, the insulation 4.1.1 Dry type transformers are to comply with IEC Publi-
of the equipment is to be designed for the phase-to-phase cation 60726.
voltage.
Liquid cooled transformers are to comply with IEC Publica-
A system is defined effectively earthed (low impedance) tion 60076.
when this factor is lower than 0,8. A system is defined non-
Oil immersed transformers are to be provided with the fol-
effectively earthed (high impedance) when this factor is
lowing alarms and protection:
higher than 0,8.
• liquid level (Low) - alarm
Note 1: Earthing factor is defined as the ratio between the phase-to-
earth voltage of the health phase and the phase-to-phase voltage. • liquid temperature (High) - alarm
This factor may vary between 1/31/2 and 1. • liquid level (Low) - trip or load reduction

2.4.3 Power transformers are to be provided with overload • liquid temperature (High) - trip or load reduction
and short circuit protection. • gas pressure relay (High) - trip.

April 2007 Bureau Veritas 87

Pt C, Ch 2, Sec 13

5 Cables 6.4 High voltage test

6.4.1 A power-frequency voltage test is to be carried out on

5.1 General any switchgear and controlgear assemblies. The test proce-
dure and voltages are to be according to IEC Publication
5.1.1 Cables are to be constructed in accordance with IEC
62271-200.
Publication 60092-353 and 60092-354 or other equivalent
Standard.
7 Installation
6 Switchgear and controlgear assemblies
7.1 Electrical equipment
6.1 General 7.1.1 Where equipment is not contained in an enclosure
but a room forms the enclosure of the equipment, the
6.1.1 Switchgear and controlgear assemblies are to be con- access doors are to be so interlocked that they cannot be
structed in accordance with IEC Publication 62271-200 and opened until the supply is isolated and the equipment
the following additional requirements. earthed down.
At the entrance to spaces where high-voltage electrical
6.2 Construction equipment is installed, a suitable marking is to be placed
indicating danger of high voltage. As regards high-voltage
6.2.1 Switchgear is to be of metal-enclosed type in accord- electrical equipment installed outside the aforementioned
ance with IEC Publication 62271-200 or of the insulation- spaces, similar marking is to be provided.
enclosed type in accordance with IEC Publication 60466.

6.2.2 Withdrawable circuit breakers and switches are to be 7.2 Cables

provided with mechanical locking facilities in both service
and disconnected positions. For maintenance purposes, key 7.2.1 In accommodation spaces, high voltage cables are to
locking of withdrawable circuit breakers and switches and be run in enclosed cable transit systems.
fixed disconnectors is to be possible.
7.2.2 High voltage cables are to be segregated from cables
Withdrawable circuit breakers are to be located in the serv- operating at different voltage ratings; in particular, they are
ice position so that there is no relative motion between not to be run in the same cable bunch, in the same ducts or
fixed and moving portions. pipes, or in the same box.
Where high voltage cables of different voltage ratings are
6.2.3 The fixed contacts of withdrawable circuit breakers
installed on the same cable tray, the air clearance between
and switches are to be so arranged that in the withdrawable
cables is not to be less than the minimum air clearance for the
position the live contacts are automatically covered.
higher voltage side in [2.3.1]. However, high voltage cables
6.2.4 For maintenance purposes an adequate number of are not to be installed on the same cable tray for cables oper-
earthing and short-circuiting devices is to be provided to ating at the nominal system voltage of 1 kV and less.
enable circuits to be worked on in safety.
7.2.3 High voltage cables are generally to be installed on
carrier plating when they are provided with a continuous
6.3 Auxiliary systems metallic sheath or armour which is effectively bonded to
earth; otherwise, they are to be installed for their entire
6.3.1 If electrical energy and/or physical energy is required length in metallic castings effectively bonded to earth.
for the operation of circuit-breakers and switches, a store
supply of such energy is to be provided for at least two 7.2.4 Terminations in all conductors of high voltage cables
operations of all the components. are, as far as practicable, to be effectively covered with suit-
However, the tripping due to overload or short-circuit, and able insulating material. In terminal boxes, if conductors are
under-voltage is to be independent of any stored electrical not insulated, phases are to be separated from earth and
energy sources. This does not preclude shunt tripping pro- from each other by substantial barriers of suitable insulating
vided that alarms are activated upon lack of continuity in materials.
the release circuits and power supply failures. High voltage cables of the radial field type, i.e. having a
conductive layer to control the electric field within the insu-
6.3.2 When external source of supply is necessary for aux- lation, are to have terminations which provide electric stress
iliary circuits, at least two external sources of supply are to control.
be provided and so arranged that a failure or loss of one
Terminations are to be of a type compatible with the insula-
source will not cause the loss of more than one generator
tion and jacket material of the cable and are to be provided
set and/or a main switchboard section as described in
with means to ground all metallic shielding components
[2.1.1] and/or set of essential services.
(i.e. tapes, wires etc).
Where necessary one source of supply is to be from the
emergency source of electrical power for the start up from 7.2.5 High voltage cables are to be readily identifiable by
dead ship condition. suitable marking.

88 Bureau Veritas April 2007

 Pt C, Ch 2, Sec 13

7.2.6 Before a new high voltage cable installation, or an The test voltage is to be maintained for a minimum of
addition to an existing installation, is put into service, a 15 minutes.
voltage withstand test is to be satisfactorily carried out on
each completed cable and its accessories. After completion of the test, the conductors are to be con-
nected to earth for a sufficient period in order to remove
The test is to be carried out after an insulation resistance test.
any trapped electric charge.
When a d.c. voltage withstand test is carried out, the volt-
age is to be not less than: An insultation resistance test is then repeated.
• 1,6 (2,5 Uo + 2 kV) for cables of rated voltage (Uo) up Alternatively, an a.c. voltage withstand test may be carried
to and including 3,6 kV, or out on the advice of the high voltage cable manufacturer at
• 4,2 Uo for higher rated voltages a voltage not less than the normal operating voltage of the
cable, to be maintained for a minimum of 24 hours.
where Uo is the rated power frequency voltage between
conductor and earth or metallic screen, for which the cable Note 1: Tests specified in IEC Publication 60502 will be considered
is designed. adequate.

April 2007 Bureau Veritas 89

Pt C, Ch 2, Sec 14

SECTION 14 ELECTRIC PROPULSION PLANT

1 General 2 Design of the propulsion plant

1.1 Applicable requirements 2.1 General

2.1.1 The electrical power for the propulsion system may
1.1.1 The following requirements apply to ships for which be supplied from generating sets, dedicated to the propul-
the main propulsion plants are provided by at least one sion system, or from a central power generation plant,
electric propulsion motor and its electrical supply. All elec- which supplies the ship’s services and electric propulsion.
trical components of the propulsion plants are to comply
The minimum configuration of an electric propulsion plant
with these requirements.
consists of one prime mover, one generator and one electric
motor. When the electrical production used for propulsion
1.1.2 Prime movers are to comply with the requirements of is independent of the shipboard production, the diesel
Ch 1, Sec 2. engines driving the electric generators are to be considered
as main engines.
1.1.3 For the torsional vibration characteristics of the elec-
Note 1: When the electric power plant is constituted with 2 genera-
tric propulsion plant, the provisions of Ch 1, Sec 9 apply. tors, the corresponding prime movers are to be considered as main
propulsion medium. For electrical propulsion plant fitted with more
1.1.4 Cooling and lubricating oil systems are to comply than 2 generators, they will be considered as auxiliary generators. The
with the requirements of Ch 1, Sec 10. corresponding control and monitoring will be considered accordingly.

2.1.2 For plants having only one propulsion motor control-

1.1.5 Monitoring and control systems are to comply with
led via a static convertor, a standby convertor which it is
the requirements of Part C, Chapter 3.
easy to switch over to is to be provided. Double stator
windings with one convertor for each winding are consid-
1.1.6 Installations assigned an additional notation for auto-
ered as an alternative solution.
mation are to comply with the requirements of Part E, Chap-
ter 3 and Part E, Chapter 4. 2.1.3 In electric propulsion plants having two or more con-
stant voltage propulsion generating sets, the electrical
1.2 Operating conditions power for the ship’s auxiliary services may be derived from
this source. Additional ship’s generators for auxiliary serv-
ices need not be fitted provided that effective propulsion
1.2.1 The normal torque available on the electric propul-
and the services mentioned in Ch 2, Sec 3, [2.2.3] are
sion motors for manoeuvring is to be such as to enable the
maintained with any one generating set out of service.
vessel to be stopped or reversed when sailing at its maxi-
mum service speed. Where transformers are used to supply the ship’s auxiliary
services, see Ch 2, Sec 5.
1.2.2 Adequate torque margin is to be provided for three- 2.1.4 Plants having two or more propulsion generators, two
phase synchronous motors to avoid the motor pulling out of or more static convertors or two or more motors on one pro-
synchronism during rough weather and when turning. peller shaft are to be so arranged that any unit may be taken
out of service and disconnected electrically, without affect-
1.2.3 Means are to be provided to limit the continuous ing the operation of the others.
input to the electric propulsion motor. This value is not to
exceed the continuous full load torque for which motor and
2.2 Power supply
shafts are designed.
2.2.1 Where the plant is intended exclusively for electric
1.2.4 The plant as a whole is to have sufficient overload propulsion, voltage variations and maximum voltage are to
capacity to provide the torque, power and reactive power be maintained within the limits required in Ch 2, Sec 3.
needed during starting and manoeuvring conditions.
2.2.2 In special conditions (e.g. during crash-stop manoeu-
Locked rotor torque which may be required in relation to vres), frequency variations may exceed the limits stipulated
the operation of the vessel (e.g. for navigation in ice) is to be in Ch 2, Sec 3 provided that other equipment operating on
considered. the same network is not unduly affected.

1.2.5 The electric motors and shaftline are to be con- 2.2.3 The electric plant is to be so designed as to prevent the
structed and installed so that, at any speed reached in serv- harmful effects of electromagnetic interference generated by
ice, all the moving components are suitably balanced. semiconductor convertors, in accordance with Ch 2, Sec 3.

90 Bureau Veritas April 2007

 Pt C, Ch 2, Sec 14

2.3 Auxiliary machinery 2.5.4 For the protection of field windings and cables,
means are to be provided for limiting the induced voltage
2.3.1 Propeller/thruster auxiliary plants are to be supplied when the field circuits are opened. Alternatively, the
directly from the main switchboard or from the main distri- induced voltage when the field circuits are opened is to be
bution board or from a distribution board reserved for such maintained at the nominal design voltage.
circuits, at the auxiliary rated voltage.
2.5.5 In excitation circuits, there is to be no overload pro-
2.3.2 When the installation has one or more lubrication tection causing the opening of the circuit, except for excita-
systems, devices are to be provided to ensure the monitor- tion circuits with semiconductor convertors.
ing of the lubricating oil return temperature.
2.5.6 Each exciter is to be supplied by a separate feeder.
2.3.3 Propelling machinery installations with a forced
lubrication system are to be provided with alarm devices
which will operate in the event of oil pressure loss.
3 Construction of rotating machines
and semiconductor convertors
2.4 Electrical Protection
3.1 Ventilation
2.4.1 Automatic disconnections of electric propulsion
plants which adversely affect the manoeuvrability of the 3.1.1 Where electrical machines are fitted with an inte-
ship are to be restricted to faults liable to cause severe dam- grated fan and are to be operated at speeds below the rated
age to the equipment. speed with full load torque, full load current, full load exci-
tation or the like, the design temperature rise is not to be
2.4.2 The following protection of convertors is to be pro- exceeded.
vided:
• protection against overvoltage in the supply systems to 3.1.2 Where electrical machines or convertors are force-
which convertors are connected ventilated, at least two fans, or other suitable arrangements,
are to be provided so that limited operation is possible in
• protection against overcurrents in semiconductor ele- the event of one fan failing.
ments during normal operation
• short-circuit protection.
3.2 Protection against moisture and con-
2.4.3 Overcurrent protective devices in the main circuits densate
are to be set sufficiently high so that there is no possibility of
activation due to the overcurrents caused in the course of 3.2.1 Machines and equipment which may be subject to
normal operation, e.g. during manoeuvring or in heavy seas. the accumulation of moisture and condensate are to be pro-
vided with effective means of heating. The latter is to be
2.4.4 Overcurrent protection may be replaced by auto- provided for motors above 500 kW, in order to maintain the
matic control systems ensuring that overcurrents do not temperature inside the machine at about 3°C above the
reach values which may endanger the plant, e.g. by selec- ambient temperature.
tive tripping or rapid reduction of the magnetic fluxes of the
generators and motors. 3.2.2 Provision is to be made to prevent the accumulation
of bilge water, which is likely to enter inside the machine.
2.4.5 In the case of propulsion plants supplied by genera-
tors in parallel, suitable controls are to ensure that, if one or 3.3 Rotating machines
more generators are disconnected, those remaining are not
overloaded by the propulsion motors. 3.3.1 Electrical machines are to be able to withstand the
excess speed which may occur during operation of the ship.
2.4.6 In three-phase systems, phase-balance protective
devices are to be provided for the motor circuit which de- 3.3.2 The design of rotating machines supplied by static
excite the generators and motors or disconnect the circuit convertors is to consider the effects of harmonics.
concerned.
3.3.3 The winding insulation of electrical machines is to be
2.5 Excitation of electric propulsion motor capable of withstanding the overvoltage which may occur
in manoeuvring conditions.
2.5.1 Each propulsion motor is to have its own exciter.
3.3.4 The design of a.c. machines is to be such that they
2.5.2 For plants where only one generator or only one can withstand without damage a sudden short-circuit at
motor is foreseen, each machine is to be provided with a their terminals under rated operating conditions.
standby exciter, which it is easy to switch over to.
3.3.5 The obtainable current and voltage of exciters and
2.5.3 In the case of multi-propeller propulsion ships, only their supply are to be suitable for the output required during
one standby exciter is to be provided. Switch-over opera- manoeuvring and overcurrent conditions, including short-
tion is to be easy. circuit in the transient period.

April 2007 Bureau Veritas 91

Pt C, Ch 2, Sec 14

3.4 Semiconductor convertors • monitoring of the alarms: any event critical for the
proper operation of an essential auxiliary or a main ele-
3.4.1 The following limiting repetitive peak voltages U RM ment of the installation requiring immediate action to
are to be used as a base for each semiconductor valve: avoid a breakdown is to activate an alarm
• when connected to a supply specifically for propeller • speed or pitch control of the propeller
drives: • shutdown or slow down when necessary.
URM = 1,5 UP
4.2.7 Where the electric propulsion system is supplied by
• when connected to a common main supply: the main switchboard together with the ship’s services, load
URM = 1,8 UP shedding of the non-essential services and /or power limita-
tion of the electric propulsion is to be provided. An alarm is
where to be triggered in the event of power limitation or load
UP : Peak value of the rated voltage at the input of shedding.
the semiconductor convertor.
4.2.8 The risk of blackout due to electric propulsion opera-
3.4.2 For semiconductor convertor elements connected in tion is to be eliminated. At the request of the Society, a fail-
series, the values in [3.4.1] are to be increased by 10%. ure mode and effects analysis is to be carried out to
Equal voltage distribution is to be ensured. demonstrate the reliability of the system.

3.4.3 For parallel-connected convertor elements, an equal 4.3 Indicating instruments

current distribution is to be ensured.
4.3.1 In addition to the provisions of Part C, Chapter 3 of
3.4.4 Means are to be provided, where necessary, to limit the Rules, instruments indicating consumed power and
the effects of the rate of harmonics to the system and to power available for propulsion are to be provided at each
other semiconductor convertors. Suitable filters are to be propulsion remote control position.
installed to keep the current and voltage within the limits
given in Ch 2, Sec 2. 4.3.2 The instruments specified in [4.3.3] and [4.3.4] in
relation to the type of plant are to be provided on the power
control board or in another appropriate position.
4 Control and monitoring
4.3.3 The following instruments are required for each pro-
4.1 General pulsion alternator:
• an ammeter on each phase, or with a selector switch to
4.1.1 The control and monitoring systems, including com- all phases
puter based systems, are to be type approved, according to • a voltmeter with a selector switch to all phases
Ch 3, Sec 6.
• a wattmeter
• a tachometer or frequency meter
4.2 Power plant control systems
• a power factor meter or a var-meter or a field ammeter
4.2.1 The power plant control systems are to ensure that for each alternator operating in parallel
adequate propulsion power is available, by means of auto- • a temperature indicator for direct reading of the temper-
matic control systems and/or manual remote control systems. ature of the stator windings, for each alternator rated
above 500 kW.
4.2.2 The automatic control systems are to be such that, in
the event of a fault, the propeller speed and direction of 4.3.4 The following instruments are required for each a.c.
thrust do not undergo substantial variations. propulsion motor:
• an ammeter on the main circuit
4.2.3 Failure of the power plant control system is not to
• an embedded sensor for direct reading of the tempera-
cause complete loss of generated power (i.e. blackout) or
ture of the stator windings, for motors rated above
loss of propulsion.
500 kW
4.2.4 The loss of power plant control systems is not to • an ammeter on the excitation circuit for each synchro-
cause variations in the available power; i.e. starting or stop- nous motor
ping of generating sets is not to occur as a result. • a voltmeter for the measurement of the voltage between
phases of each motor supplied through a semiconductor
4.2.5 Where power-aided control (for example with electri- frequency convertor.
cal, pneumatic or hydraulic aid) is used for manual opera-
tion, failure of such aid is not to result in interruption of 4.3.5 Where a speed measuring system is used for control
power to the propeller. Any such device is to be capable of and indication, the system is to be duplicated with separate
purely manual local operation. sensor circuits and separate power supply.

4.2.6 The control system is to include the following main 4.3.6 An ammeter is to be provided on the supply circuit
functions: for each propulsion semiconductor bridge.

92 Bureau Veritas April 2007

 Pt C, Ch 2, Sec 14

4.4 Alarm system • high winding temperature of propulsion generators and

motors
4.4.1 An alarm system is to be provided, in accordance • fan failure in machines and convertors provided with
with the requirements of Part C, Chapter 3. The system is to forced ventilation, or failure of cooling system
give an indication at the control positions when the param-
eters specified in [4.4] assume abnormal values or any • lack of coolant in machines and semiconductor conver-
event occurs which can affect the electric propulsion. tors
• load limitation of generators or inadequate available
4.4.2 Where an alarm system is provided for other essential power.
equipment or installations, the alarms in [4.4.1] may be
connected to such system. 4.5.2 When power is reduced automatically, this is to be
indicated at the propulsion control position (critical alarm).
4.4.3 Critical alarms for propulsion are to be indicated to
the bridge separately. 4.5.3 Switching-off of the semiconductors in the event of
abnormal service operation is to be provided in accordance
4.4.4 The following alarms are to be provided, where with the manufacturer’s specification.
applicable:
• high temperature of the cooling air of machines and
semiconductor convertors provided with forced ventila-
5 Installation
tion (see Note 1)
• reduced flow of primary and secondary coolants of 5.1 Ventilation of spaces
machines and semiconductor convertors having a
closed cooling system with a heat exchanger 5.1.1 Loss of ventilation to spaces with forced air cooling is
not to cause loss of propulsion. To this end, two sets of ven-
• leakage of coolant inside the enclosure of machines and tilation fans are to be provided, one acting as a standby unit
semiconductor convertors with liquid-air heat exchangers for the other. Equivalent arrangements using several inde-
• high winding temperature of generators and propulsion pendently supplied fans may be considered.
motors, where required (see [4.3])
• low lubricating oil pressure of bearings for machines 5.2 Cable runs
with forced oil lubrication
• tripping of protective devices against overvoltages in 5.2.1 Instrumentation and control cables are to comply
semiconductor convertors (critical alarm) with the requirements of Ch 3, Sec 5 of the Rules.

• tripping of protection on filter circuits to limit the distur- 5.2.2 Where there is more than one propulsion motor, all
bances due to semiconductor convertors cables for any one machine are to be run as far as is practi-
• tripping of protective devices against overcurrents up to cable away from the cables of other machines.
and including short-circuit in semiconductor convertors
(critical alarm) 5.2.3 Cables which are connected to the sliprings of syn-
chronous motors are to be suitably insulated for the voltage
• voltage unbalance of three-phase a.c. systems supplied
to which they are subjected during manoeuvring.
by semiconductor frequency convertors
• earth fault for the main propulsion circuit (see Note 2)
6 Tests
• earth fault for excitation circuits of propulsion machines
(see Note 3).
6.1 Test of rotating machines
Note 1: As an alternative to the air temperature of convertors or to
the airflow, the supply of electrical energy to the ventilator or the 6.1.1 The test requirements are to comply with Ch 2, Sec 4.
temperature of the semiconductors may be monitored.
Note 2: In the case of star connected a.c. generators and motors 6.1.2 For rotating machines, such as synchronous genera-
with neutral points earthed, this device may not detect an earth tors and synchronous electric motors, of a power of more
fault in the entire winding of the machine. than 1 MW, a quality plan detailing the different controls
Note 3: This may be omitted in brushless excitation systems and in during the machine assembly is to be submitted to the Soci-
the excitation circuits of machines rated up to 500 kW. In such ety for approval.
cases, lamps, voltmeters or other means are to be provided to
detect the insulation status under operating conditions. 6.1.3 In relation to the evaluation of the temperature rise, it
is necessary to consider the supplementary thermal losses
4.5 Reduction of power induced by harmonic currents in the stator winding. To this
end, two methods may be used:
4.5.1 Power is to be automatically reduced in the following • direct test method, when the electric propulsion motor
cases: is being supplied by its own frequency convertor, and/or
• low lubricating oil pressure of bearings of propulsion back to back arrangement according to the supplier’s
generators and motors facility

April 2007 Bureau Veritas 93

Pt C, Ch 2, Sec 14

• indirect test method as defined in Ch 2, App 1; in this sidered. The commutator may be submitted to cycles
case, a validation of the estimation of the temperature comprising full or partial rotation in relation to the use
excess due to harmonics is to be documented. A justifi- of the POD as steering gear. The voltage drops and cur-
cation based on a computer program calculation may rent are to be recorded.
be taken into consideration, provided that validation of
such program is demonstrated by previous experience. An overload test is to be carried out in accordance with
Ch 2, Sec 4 (minimum 150%, 15 seconds)

6.1.4 Rotating machines used for propulsion or manoeu- • check of the behaviour of the sliprings when subjected
vring are to be subjected to the tests stated in Ch 2, Sec 4, to the vibration defined in Ch 3, Sec 6
[5.1.1].
• check of the behaviour of the sliprings, after damp heat
test, as defined in Part C, Chapter 3, and possible corro-
7 Specific requirements for PODs sion of the moving parts and contacts.

After the damp heat test, the following are to be carried out:
7.1 General
• insulation measurement resistance test: the minimum
7.1.1 The requirements for the structural part of a POD are resistance is to be in accordance with Ch 2, Sec 4, Tab 2
specified in Pt B, Ch 10, Sec 1, [11]. • dielectric strength test as defined in Ch 2, Sec 4.

7.1.2 When used as steering manoeuvring system, the

POD is to comply with the requirements of Ch 1, Sec 11. 7.3 Electric motor

7.3.1 The thermal losses are dissipated by the liquid cool-

7.2 Rotating commutator ing of the bulb and by the internal ventilation of the POD.
The justification for the evaluation of the heating balance
7.2.1 As far as the electrical installation is concerned, the between the sea water and air cooling is to be submitted to
electric motor is supplied by a rotating commutator which the Society.
rotates with the POD. The fixed part of the power transmis-
sion is connected to the ship supply, which uses the same Note 1: The calculation method used for the evaluation of the cool-
ing system (mainly based on computer programs) is to be docu-
components as a conventional propulsion system. Sliding
mented. The calculation method is to be justified based on the
contacts with a suitable support are used between the fixed
experience of the designer of the system. The results of scale model
and rotating parts. tests or other methods may be taken into consideration.

7.2.2 The rotating commutator is to be type approved. Type 7.3.2 Means to adjust the air cooler characteristics are to
tests are to be carried out, unless the manufacturer can pro- be provided on board, in order to obtain an acceptable tem-
duce evidence based on previous experience indicating the perature rise of the windings. Such means are to be set fol-
satisfactory performance of such equipment on board ships. lowing the dock and sea trials.

7.2.3 A test program is to be submitted to the Society for 7.3.3 Vibrations of the electric motor are to be monitored.
approval. It is to be to demonstrated that the power trans- The alarm set point is to be defined in accordance with the
mission and transmission of low level signals are not manufacturer recommendation.
affected by the environmental and operational conditions
prevailing on board. To this end, the following checks and
tests are to be considered: 7.4 Instrumentation and associated devices
• check of the protection index (IP), in accordance with
7.4.1 Means are to be provided to transmit the low level
the location of the rotating commutator
signals connected to the sensors located in the POD.
• check of the clearances and creepage distances

• check of insulation material (according to the test proce- 7.5 Additional tests and tests on board
dure described in IEC Publication 60112)
7.5.1 Tests of electric propulsion motors are to be carried
• endurance test: out in accordance with Ch 2, Sec 4, and other tests in
accordance with Ch 1, Sec 15.
After the contact pressure and rated current are set, the
commutator is subjected to a rotation test. The number
of rotations is evaluated taking into consideration the 7.5.2 Tests are to be performed to check the validation of
ship operation and speed rotation control system. The the temperature rise calculation.
possibility of turning the POD 180° to proceed astern
and 360° to return to the original position is to be con- 7.5.3 Tests on board are described in Ch 1, Sec 15, [3.7].

94 Bureau Veritas April 2007

 Pt C, Ch 2, Sec 15

SECTION 15 TESTING

1 General The installation may be subdivided to any desired extent

and appliances may be disconnected if initial tests give
results less than that indicated above.
1.1 Rule application
1.1.1 Before a new installation, or any alteration or addi- 3.2 Internal communication circuits
tion to an existing installation, is put into service, the elec-
trical equipment is to be tested in accordance with [3], [4] 3.2.1 Circuits operating at a voltage of 50 V and above are
and [5] to the satisfaction of the Surveyor in charge. to have an insulation resistance between conductors and
between each conductor and earth of at least 1 MΩ.
1.2 Insulation-testing instruments
3.2.2 Circuits operating at voltages below 50 V are to have
1.2.1 Insulation resistance may be measured with an an insulation resistance between conductors and between
instrument applying a voltage of at least 500 V. The meas- each conductor and earth of at least 0,33 MΩ.
urement will be taken when the deviation of the measuring
device is stabilised. 3.2.3 If necessary, any or all appliances connected to the cir-
Note 1:Any electronic devices present in the installation are to be cuit may be disconnected while the test is being conducted.
disconnected prior to the test in order to prevent damage.

1.2.2 For high voltage installation, the measurement is to 3.3 Switchboards

be taken with an instrument applying a voltage adapted to
the rated value and agreed with the Society. 3.3.1 The insulation resistance between each busbar and
earth and between each insulated busbar and the busbar
connected to the other poles (or phases) of each main
2 Type approved components switchboard, emergency switchboard, section board, etc. is
to be not less than 1 MΩ.
2.1
3.3.2 The test is to be performed before the switchboard is
2.1.1 The following components are to be type approved put into service with all circuit-breakers and switches open,
or in accordance with [2.1.2]: all fuse-links for pilot lamps, earth fault-indicating lamps,
• electrical cables voltmeters, etc. removed and voltage coils temporarily dis-
• transformers connected where otherwise damage may result.
• rotating machines
• electrical convertors for primary essential services 3.4 Generators and motors
• switching devices (circuit-breakers, contactors, discon-
nectors, etc.) and overcurrent protective devices 3.4.1 The insulation resistance of generators and motors, in
normal working condition and with all parts in place, is to
• sensors, alarm panels, electronic protective devices,
be measured and recorded.
automatic and remote control equipment, actuators,
safety devices for installations intended for essential 3.4.2 The test is to be carried out with the machine hot
services (steering, controllable pitch propellers, propul- immediately after running with normal load.
sion machinery, etc.), electronic speed regulators for
main or auxiliary engines 3.4.3 The insulation resistance of generator and motor con-
• computers used for tasks essential to safety. nection cables, field windings and starters is to be at least
1 MΩ.
2.1.2 Case by case approval based on submission of ade-
quate documentation and execution of tests may also be
granted at the discretion of the Society. 4 Earth

3 Insulation resistance 4.1 Electrical constructions

3.1 Lighting and power circuits 4.1.1 Tests are to be carried out, by visual inspection or by
means of a tester, to verify that all earth-continuity conduc-
3.1.1 The insulation resistance between all insulated poles tors and earthing leads are connected to the frames of appa-
(or phases) and earth and, where practicable, between poles ratus and to the hull, and that in socket-outlets having
(or phases), is to be at least 1 MΩ in ordinary conditions. earthing contacts, these are connected to earth.

April 2007 Bureau Veritas 95

Pt C, Ch 2, Sec 15

4.2 Metal-sheathed cables, metal pipes or 5.2 Switchgear

conduits
5.2.1 All switchgear is to be loaded and, when found nec-
4.2.1 Tests are to be performed, by visual inspection or by essary by the attending Surveyor, the operation of overcur-
means of a tester, to verify that the metal coverings of rent protective devices is to be verified (see Note 1).
cables and associated metal pipes, conduits, trunking and
Note 1:The workshop test is generally considered sufficient to ensure
casings are electrically continuous and effectively earthed.
that such apparatus will perform as required while in operation.

5 Operational tests 5.2.2 Short-circuit tests may also be required at the discre-
tion of the Society in order to verify the selectivity charac-
5.1 Generating sets and their protective teristics of the installation.
devices
5.3 Consuming devices
5.1.1 Generating sets are to be run at full rated load to ver-
ify that the following are satisfactory: 5.3.1 Electrical equipment is to be operated under normal
• electrical characteristics service conditions (though not necessarily at full load or
simultaneously) to verify that it is suitable and satisfactory
• commutation (if any)
for its purpose.
• lubrication
• ventilation 5.3.2 Motors and their starters are to be tested under nor-
• noise and vibration level. mal operating conditions to verify that the following are sat-
isfactory:
5.1.2 Suitable load variations are to be applied to verify the • power
satisfactory operation under steady state and transient con-
ditions (see Ch 2, Sec 4, [2] ) of: • operating characteristics
• voltage regulators • commutation (if any)
• speed governors. • speed

5.1.3 Generating sets intended to operate in parallel are to • direction of rotation

be tested over a range of loading up to full load to verify • alignment.
that the following are satisfactory:
• parallel operation 5.3.3 The remote stops foreseen are to be tested.
• sharing of the active load
5.3.4 Lighting fittings, heating appliances etc. are to be
• sharing of the reactive load (for a.c. generators).
tested under operating conditions to verify that they are suit-
Synchronising devices are also to be tested. able and satisfactory for their purposes (with particular
regard to the operation of emergency lighting).
5.1.4 The satisfactory operation of the following protective
devices is to be verified:
5.4 Communication systems
• overspeed protection
• overcurrent protection (see Note 1) 5.4.1 Communication systems, order transmitters and
• load-shedding devices mechanical engine-order telegraphs are to be tested to ver-
ify their suitability.
• any other safety devices.

For sets intended to operate in parallel, the correct opera- 5.5 Installations in areas with a risk of
tion of the following is also to be verified: explosion
• reverse-power protection for a.c. installations (or
reverse-current protection for d.c. installations) 5.5.1 Installations and the relevant safety certification are
• minimum voltage protection. to be examined to ensure that they are of a type permitted
in the various areas and that the integrity of the protection
Note 1:Simulated tests may be used to carry out this check where concept has not been impaired.
appropriate.

5.1.5 The satisfactory operation of the emergency source of 5.6 Voltage drop
power and of the transitional source of power, when
required, is to be tested. In particular, the automatic starting 5.6.1 Where it is deemed necessary by the attending Sur-
and the automatic connection to the emergency switch- veyor, the voltage drop is to be measured to verify that the
board, in case of failure of the main source of electrical permissible limits are not exceeded (see Ch 2, Sec 3,
power, are to be tested. [9.11.4]).

96 Bureau Veritas April 2007

 Pt C, Ch 2, App 1

APPENDIX 1 INDIRECT TEST METHOD FOR SYNCHRONOUS

MACHINES

1 General • Test N° 3: Zero excitation. The temperature of all wind-

ings depends on the mechanical losses due to friction
and ventilation, where:
1.1 Test method
• ∆ts3 is the stator temperature rise
1.1.1 The machine is to be subject to the three separate • ∆tr3 is the rotor temperature rise.
running tests specified below (see Fig 1) when it is complete
(with covers, heat exchangers, all control devices and sen- Note 1: The synchronous electric motor is supplied at its rated
speed by a driving motor. The temperature balance will be consid-
sors), the exciter circuit is connected to its normal supply or ered as being obtained, when the temperature rise does not vary by
to a separate supply having the same characteristics, and the more than 2°C per hour.
supply is fitted with the necessary measuring instruments:
1.1.2 Temperature measurements of the stator winding can
• Test N° 1: No load test at rated voltage and current on
be based on the use of embedded temperature sensors or
rotor, stator winding in open circuit. The temperature measurement of winding resistance. When using the resist-
rise of the stator winding depends, in such case, on the ance method for calculation of the temperature rise, the
magnetic circuit losses and mechanical losses due to resistance measurement is to be carried out as soon as the
ventilation, where: machine is shut down.

• ∆ts1 is the stator temperature rise The rotor temperature rise is obtained by calculation of
rotor resistance, Rrotor = U/Ir , where U and I are the volt-
• ∆tr1 is the rotor temperature rise. age and current in the magnetic field winding.

• Test N° 2: Rated stator winding current with the termi- The following parameters are recorded, every 1/2 hour:
nals short-circuited. The temperature of the stator wind-
• temperature sensors as well as the stator current and
ing depends on the thermal Joule losses and mechanical voltage
losses, as above, where:
• the main field voltage and current
• ∆ts2 is the stator temperature rise
• the bearing temperatures (embedded sensor or ther-
• ∆tr2 is the rotor temperature rise, which for test N° 2 mometer), and the condition of cooling of the bearings,
is negligible. which are to be compared to those expected on board.

Figure 1 : Schematic diagram used for the test

Propulsion electric motor

Exciter circuit

Shaft
coupling

Driving motor
Exciter rotating machine
Rotating diods

TEST N˚1 Open circuit and TEST N˚3

TEST N˚2 Short circuit

April 2007 Bureau Veritas 97

Pt C, Ch 2, App 1

1.1.3 The tests described above allow the determination of equal to 1), the temperature rise of the rotor is to be cor-
the final temperature rise of stator and rotor windings with rected as follows:
an acceptable degree of accuracy.
• The temperature rise of the stator winding is estimated ∆t rotor = (∆tr1 − ∆tr3) x (rated loading conditions Ir/ test
as follows: loading conditions Irt)2 + ∆tr3
∆t stator = ∆ts1 + ∆ts2 − ∆ts3
∆t stator winding is to be corrected by the supplemen- 1.1.4 In the indirect method, a possible mutual influence of
tary temperature rise due to current harmonics evalu- the temperature rise between the stator and the rotor is not
ated by the manufacturer taken into consideration. The test results may be representa-
• Considering that in test N° 1 the magnetic field winding tive of the temperature rise on board ship, but a margin of
current Irt is different from the manufacturer’s estimated 10 to 15°C is advisable compared with the permitted tem-
value Ir (due to the fact that the cos ϕ in operation is not perature of the Rules and the measure obtained during tests.

98 Bureau Veritas April 2007

 Part C
Machinery, Electricity, Automation and
Fire Protection

Chapter 3

AUTOMATION

SECTION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 3 COMPUTER BASED SYSTEMS

SECTION 4 CONSTRUCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 5 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 6 TESTING

April 2007 Bureau Veritas 99

100 Bureau Veritas April 2007
 Pt C, Ch 3, Sec 1

SECTION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

1 General • Computer based system is a system of one or more com-

puters, associated software, peripherals and interfaces,
and the computer network with its protocol.
1.1 Field of application
• Control station is a group of control and monitoring
1.1.1 The following requirements apply to automation sys- devices by means of which an operator can control and
tems, installed on all ships, intended for essential services verify the performance of equipment.
as defined in Ch 2, Sec 1. They also apply to systems • Control system is a system by which an intentional action
required in Part C, Chapter 1 and Part C, Chapter 2, is exerted on an apparatus to attain given purposes.
installed on all ships. • Expert system is an intelligent knowledge-based system
that is designed to solve a problem with information that
1.1.2 This chapter is intended to avoid that failures or mal- has been compiled using some form of human expertise.
functions of automation systems associated with essential
• Fail safe is a design property of an item in which the
and non-essential services cause danger to other essential
specified failure mode is predominantly in a safe direc-
services.
tion with regard to the safety of the ship, as a primary
concern.
1.1.3 Requirements for unattended machinery spaces and
for additional notations are specified in Part E. • Full redundant is used to describe an automation system
comprising two (identical or non-identical) independent
systems which perform the same function and operate
1.2 Regulations and standards simultaneously.
1.2.1 The regulations and standards applicable are those • Hot standby system is used to describe an automation
defined in Ch 2, Sec 1. system comprising two (identical or non-identical) inde-
pendent systems which perform the same function, one
of which is in operation while the other is on standby
1.3 Definitions with an automatic change-over switch.
1.3.1 Unless otherwise stated, the terms used in this chap- • Instrumentation is a sensor or monitoring element.
ter have the definitions laid down in Ch 2, Sec 1 or in the • Integrated system is a system consisting of two or more
IEC standards. The following definitions also apply: subsystems having independent functions connected by
a data transmission network and operated from one or
• Alarm indicator is an indicator which gives a visible
more workstations.
and/or audible warning upon the appearance of one or
more faults to advise the operator that his attention is • Local control is control of an operation at a point on or
required. adjacent to the controlled switching device.
• Alarm system is a system intended to give a signal in the • Monitoring system is a system designed to observe the
event of abnormal running condition. correct operation of the equipment by detecting incor-
rect functioning (measure of variables compared
• Application software is a software performing tasks spe- with specified value).
cific to the actual configuration of the computer based
system and supported by the basic software. • Safety system is a system intended to limit the conse-
quence of failure and is activated automatically when
• Automatic control is the control of an operation without an abnormal condition appears.
direct or indirect human intervention, in response to the
• Software is the program, procedures and associated
occurrence of predetermined conditions.
documentation pertaining to the operation of the com-
• Automation systems are systems including control sys- puter system.
tems and monitoring systems. • Redundancy is the existence of more than one means
• Basic software is the minimum software, which includes for performing a required function.
firmware and middleware, required to support the • Remote control is the control from a distance of appara-
application software. tus by means of an electrical or other link.
• Cold standby system is a duplicated system with a man-
ual commutation or manual replacement of cards which 1.4 General
are live and non-operational. The duplicated system is
to be able to achieve the operation of the main system 1.4.1 The automation systems and components, as indi-
with identical performance, and be operational within cated in Ch 2, Sec 15, [2], are to be chosen from among the
10 minutes. list of type approved products.

April 2007 Bureau Veritas 101

Pt C, Ch 3, Sec 1

They are to be approved on the basis of the applicable Society the documents (plans, diagrams, specifications and
requirements of these Rules and in particular those stated in calculations) requested in this Section.
this Chapter. The list of documents requested is to be intended as guid-
Case by case approval may also be granted at the discretion ance for the complete set of information to be submitted,
of the Society, based on submission of adequate documen- rather than an actual list of titles.
tation and subject to the satisfactory outcome of any The Society reserves the right to request the submission of
required tests. additional documents in the case of non-conventional
design or if it is deemed necessary for the evaluation of the
1.4.2 Main and auxiliary machinery essential for the pro-
system, equipment or components.
pulsion, control and safety of the ship shall be provided
with effective means for its operation and control. Plans are to include all the data necessary for their interpre-
tation, verification and approval.
1.4.3 Control, alarm and safety systems are to be based on
Unless otherwise agreed with the Society, documents for
the fail-to-safety principle.
approval are to be sent in triplicate if submitted by the Ship-
1.4.4 Failure of automation systems is to generate an alarm. yard and in four copies if submitted by the equipment sup-
plier. Documents requested for information are to be sent in
1.4.5 Detailed indication, alarm and safety requirements duplicate.
regarding automation systems for individual machinery and In any case, the Society reserves the rights to require addi-
installations are to be found in tables located in Part C, tional copies, when deemed necessary.
Chapter 1 and in Part E, Chapter 3.
Each row of these tables is to correspond to one independ- 2.2 Documents to be submitted
ant sensor.
2.2.1 The documents listed in Tab 1 are to be submitted.
2 Documentation
2.3 Documents for computer based system
2.1 General
2.3.1 General
2.1.1 Before the actual construction is commenced, the For computer based systems, the documents listed in Tab 2
Manufacturer, Designer or Shipbuilder is to submit to the are to be submitted.

Table 1 : Documentation to be submitted

N° I/A (1) Documentation

1 I The general specification for the automation of the ship
2 A The detailed specification of the essential service systems
3 A The list of components used in the automation circuits, and references (Manufacturer, type, etc.)
4 I Instruction manuals
5 I Test procedures for control, alarm and safety systems
6 A A general diagram showing the monitoring and/or control positions for the various installations, with an indication
of the means of access and the means of communication between the positions as well as with the engineers
7 A The diagrams of the supply circuits of automation systems, identifying the power source
8 A The list of monitored parameters for alarm/monitoring and safety systems
9 A Diagram of the engineers’ alarm system
(1) A = to be submitted for approval;
I = to be submitted for information.

Table 2 : Computer based system documentation

N° I/A (1) Documentation

1 I System description, computer software [2.3.2]
2 A System description, computer hardware [2.3.3]
3 I System reliability analysis [2.3.4]
4 I User interface description [2.3.5]
5 I Test programs [2.3.6]
(1) A = To be submitted for approval
I = To be submitted for information.

102 Bureau Veritas April 2007

 Pt C, Ch 3, Sec 1

2.3.2 System description, computer software 2.4 Documents for type approval of equip-
This documentation is to contain: ment
• a list of all main software modules installed per hard-
ware unit with names and version numbers 2.4.1 Documents to be submitted for type approval of
• a description of all main software which is to include at equipment are listed hereafter:
least: • a request for type approval from the manufacturer or his
- a description of basic software installed per hard- authorized representative
ware unit, including communication software, when • the technical specification and drawings depicting the
applicable system, its components, characteristics, working princi-
- a description of application software. ple, installation and conditions of use and, when there
is a computer based system, the documents listed in
2.3.3 Description of computer hardware Tab 2
The documentation to be submitted is to include:
• any test reports previously prepared by specialised labo-
• hardware information of importance for the application
ratories.
and a list of documents that apply to the system
• the supply circuit diagram 2.4.2 Documentation to be submitted for type approval of
• a description of hardware and software tools for equip- software is listed in Information Note “Software Assessment
ment configuration for Shipboard Computer Based System” (NI-425).
• the information to activate the system
• general information for trouble shooting and repair 3 Environmental and supply conditions
when the system is in operation.

2.3.4 System reliability analysis 3.1 General

The documentation to be submitted is to demonstrate the
reliability of the system by means of appropriate analysis 3.1.1 General
such as: The automation system is to operate correctly when the
• a failure mode analysis describing the effects due to fail- power supply is within the range specified in Ch 3, Sec 2.
ures leading to the destruction of the automation sys-
tem. In addition, this documentation is to show the 3.1.2 Environmental conditions
consequences on other systems, if any. This analysis is The automation system is to be designed to operate satisfac-
appraised in accordance with the IEC Publication torily in the environment in which it is located. The envi-
60812, or a recognised standard ronmental conditions are described in Ch 2, Sec 2.
• test report/life test
• MTBF calculation 3.1.3 Failure behavior
• any other documentation demonstrating the reliability The automation system is to have non-critical behaviour in
of the system. the event of power supply failure, faults or restoration of
operating condition following a fault. If a redundant power
2.3.5 User interface description supply is used, it must be taken from an independent
The documentation is to contain: source.
• a description of the functions allocated to each operator
interface (keyboard/screen or equivalent) 3.2 Power supply conditions
• a description of individual screen views (schematics,
colour photos, etc.) 3.2.1 Electrical power supply
• a description of how menus are operated (tree presenta- The conditions of power supply to be considered are
tion) defined in Ch 2, Sec 2.
• an operator manual providing necessary information for
installation and use. 3.2.2 Pneumatic power supply

2.3.6 Test programs For pneumatic equipment, the operational characteristics

are to be maintained under permanent supply pressure vari-
The following test programs are to be submitted:
ations of ± 20% of the rated pressure.
• software module/unit test
Detailed requirements are given in Ch 1, Sec 10.
• software integration test
• system validation test 3.2.3 Hydraulic power supply
• on-board test.
For hydraulic equipment, the operational characteristics are
Each test program is to include: to be maintained under permanent supply pressure varia-
• a description of each test item tions of ± 20% of the rated pressure.
• a description of the acceptance criteria for each test. Detailed requirements are given in Ch 1, Sec 10.

April 2007 Bureau Veritas 103

Pt C, Ch 3, Sec 1

4 Materials and construction 5 Alterations and additions

4.1 General 5.1

4.1.1 The choice of materials and components is to be
made according to the environmental and operating condi- 5.1.1 When an alteration or addition to an approved sys-
tions in order to maintain the proper function of the equip- tem is proposed, plans are to be submitted and approved by
ment. the Society before the work of alteration or addition is com-
menced.
4.1.2 The design and construction of the automation equip-
ment is to take into account the environmental and operat- 5.1.2 A test program for verification and validation of cor-
ing conditions in order to maintain the proper function of rect operation is to be made available.
the equipment.
5.1.3 Where the modifications may affect compliance with
4.2 Type approved components the rules, they are to be carried out under survey and the
installation and testing are to be to the Surveyor’s satisfac-
4.2.1 See Ch 2, Sec 15. tion.

104 Bureau Veritas April 2007

 Pt C, Ch 3, Sec 2

SECTION 2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

1 General 2.1.4 Power supplies are to be protected against short cir-

cuit and overload for each independent automation system.
1.1 Power supplies are to be isolated.

1.1.1 All control systems essential for the propulsion, con- 3 Control systems
trol and safety of the ship shall be independent or designed
such that failure of one system does not degrade the per-
formance of another system. 3.1 General

1.1.2 Controlled systems are to have manual operation. 3.1.1 In the case of failure, the control systems used for
Failure of any part of such systems shall not prevent the use essential services are to remain in their last position they
of the manual override. had before the failure.

1.1.3 Automation systems are to have constant perform- 3.2 Local control
ance.
3.2.1 Each system is to be able to be operated manually
1.1.4 Safety functions are to be independent of control and from a position located so as to enable visual control of
monitoring functions. As far as practicable, control and operation. For detailed instrumentation for each system,
monitoring functions are also to be independent. refer to Part C, Chapter 1and Part C, Chapter 2.
1.1.5 Control, monitoring and safety systems are to have It shall also be possible to control the auxiliary machinery,
self-check facilities. In the event of failure, an alarm is to be essential for the propulsion and safety of the ship, at or near
activated. the machinery concerned.
In particular, failure of the power supply of the automation
system is to generate an alarm. 3.3 Remote control systems
1.1.6 When a computer based system is used for control, 3.3.1 When several control stations are provided, control
alarm or safety systems, it is to comply with the require- of machinery is to be possible at one station at a time.
ments of Ch 3, Sec 3.
3.3.2 At each location there shall be an indicator showing
1.1.7 The automatic change-over switch is to operate inde- which location is in control of the propulsion machinery.
pendently of both systems. When change-over occurs, no
stop of the installation is necessary and the latter is not to 3.3.3 Remote control is to be provided with the necessary
enter undefined or critical states. instrumentation, in each control station, to allow effective
control (correct function of the system, indication of control
1.1.8 Emergency stops are to be hardwired and independ- station in operation, alarm display).
ent of any computer based system.
Note 1: Computerized systems may be admitted if evidence is 3.3.4 When transferring the control location, no significant
given demonstrating they provide a safety level equivalent to a alteration of the controlled equipment is to occur. Transfer
hardwired system. of control is to be protected by an audible warning and
acknowledged by the receiving control location. The main
2 Power supply of automation systems control location is to be able to take control without
acknowledgement.

2.1
3.4 Automatic control systems
2.1.1 Automation systems are to be arranged with an auto-
matic change-over to a continuously available stand-by 3.4.1 Automatic starting, operational and control systems
power supply in case of loss of normal power source. shall include provisions for manually overriding the auto-
matic controls.
2.1.2 The capacity of the stand-by power supply is to be
sufficient to allow the normal operation of the automation 3.4.2 Automatic control is to be stable in the range of the
systems for at least half an hour. controller in normal working conditions.

2.1.3 Failure of any power supply to an automation system 3.4.3 Automatic control is to have instrumentation to verify
is to generate an audible and visual alarm. the correct function of the system.

April 2007 Bureau Veritas 105

Pt C, Ch 3, Sec 2

4 Control of propulsion machinery Note 1: Arrangements which are not in compliance with the provi-
sions of this Article may be considered for the following ships:
• ships less than 24 m in length
4.1 Remote control
• cargo ships less than 500 tons gross tonnage
4.1.1 The requirements mentioned in [3] are to be applied • ships to be assigned restricted navigation notations
for propulsion machinery. • non-propelled units.

4.1.2 The design of the remote control system shall be such 4.2.2 On board ships fitted with remote control, direct con-
that in case of its failure an alarm will be given. trol of the propulsion machinery is to be provided locally.
The local direct control is to be independent from the
4.1.3 Supply failure (voltage, fluid pressure, etc.) in propul- remote control circuits, and takes over any remote control
sion plant remote control is to activate an alarm at the con- when in use.
trol position. In the event of remote control system failure
and unless the Society considers it impracticable, the preset 4.2.3 Each local control position, including partial control
speed and direction of thrust are to be maintained until (e.g. local control of controllable pitch propellers or
local control is in operation. This applies in particular in the clutches) is to be provided with means of communication
case of loss of electric, pneumatic or hydraulic supply to the with the remote control position. The local control positions
system. are to be independent from remote control of propulsion
machinery and continue to operate in the event of a black-
4.1.4 Propulsion machinery orders from the navigation out (see Note 1 in [4.2.1]).
bridge shall be indicated in the main machinery control
room, and at the manoeuvring platform. 4.2.4 Remote control of the propulsion machinery shall be
possible only from one location at a time; at such locations
4.1.5 The control shall be performed by a single control interconnected control positions are permitted.
device for each independent propeller, with automatic per-
formance of all associated services, including, where neces- 4.2.5 The transfer of control between the navigating bridge
sary, means of preventing overload of the propulsion and machinery spaces shall be possible only in the main
machinery. Where multiple propellers are designed to oper- machinery space or the main machinery control room. The
ate simultaneously, they must be controlled by one control system shall include means to prevent the propelling thrust
device. from altering significantly, when transferring control from
one location to another (see Note 1 in [4.2.1]).
4.1.6 Indicators shall be fitted on the navigation bridge, in
the main machinery control room and at the manoeuvring 4.2.6 At the navigating bridge, the control of the routine
platform, for: manoeuvres for one line of shafting is to be performed by a
single control device: a lever, a handwheel or a push-button
• propeller speed and direction of rotation in the case of
board. However each mechanism contributing directly to
fixed pitch propellers; and
the propulsion, such as the engine, clutch, automatic brake
• propeller speed and pitch position in the case of con- or controllable pitch propeller, is to be able to be individu-
trollable pitch propellers. ally controlled, either locally or at a central monitoring and
control position in the engine room (see Note 1 in [4.2.1]).
4.1.7 The main propulsion machinery shall be provided
with an emergency stopping device on the navigation 4.2.7 Remote starting of the propulsion machinery is to be
bridge which shall be independent of the navigation bridge automatically inhibited if a condition exists which may
control system. damage the machinery, e.g. shaft turning gear engaged,
In the event that there is no reaction to an order to stop, drop of lubrication oil pressure or brake engaged.
provision is to be made for an alternative emergency stop.
4.2.8 As a general rule, the navigating bridge panels are not
This emergency stopping device may consist of a simple
to be overloaded by alarms and indications which are not
and clearly marked control device, for example a push-but-
required.
ton. This fitting is to be capable of suppressing the propeller
thrust, whatever the cause of the failure may be.
4.2.9 Automation systems shall be designed in a manner
which ensures that threshold warning of impending or
4.2 Remote control from navigating bridge imminent slowdown or shutdown of the propulsion system
is given to the officer in charge of the navigational watch in
4.2.1 Where propulsion machinery is controlled from the time to assess navigational circumstances in an emergency.
navigating bridge, the remote control is to include an auto- In particular, the systems shall control, monitor, report, alert
matic device such that the number of operations to be car- and take safety action to slowdown or stop propulsion
ried out is reduced and their nature is simplified and such while providing the officer in charge of the navigational
that control is possible in both the ahead and astern direc- watch an opportunity to manually intervene, except for
tions. Where necessary, means for preventing overload and those cases where manual intervention will result in total
running in critical speed ranges of the propulsion machin- failure of the engine and/or propulsion equipment within a
ery is to be provided. short time, for example in the case of overspeed.

106 Bureau Veritas April 2007

 Pt C, Ch 3, Sec 2

4.3 Automatic control 5 Remote control of valves

4.3.1 The requirements in [3] are applicable. In addition,
5.1
the following requirements are to be considered, if relevant.
5.1.1 The following requirements are applicable to valves
4.3.2 Main turbine propulsion machinery and, where appli- whose failure could impair essential services.
cable, main internal combustion propulsion machinery and
auxiliary machinery shall be provided with automatic shut- 5.1.2 Failure of the power supply is not to permit a valve to
off arrangements in the case of failures such as lubricating move to an unsafe condition.
oil supply failure which could lead rapidly to complete
breakdown, serious damage or explosion. 5.1.3 An indication is to be provided at the remote control
station showing the actual position of the valve or whether
4.3.3 The automatic control system is to be designed on a the valve is fully open or fully closed.
fail safe basis, and, in the event of failure, the system is to
be adjusted automatically to a predetermined safe state. 5.1.4 When valves are remote controlled, a secondary
means of operating them is to be provided which may be
4.3.4 Operations following any setting of the bridge control manual control.
device (including reversing from the maximum ahead serv-
ice speed in case of emergency) are to take place in an 6 Alarm system
automatic sequence and with acceptable time intervals , as
prescribed by the manufacturer.
6.1 General requirements
4.3.5 For steam turbines, a slow turning device is to be pro-
6.1.1 Alarms are to be visual and audible and are to be
vided which operates automatically if the turbine is stopped
clearly distinguishable, in the ambient noise and lighting in
longer than admissible. Discontinuation of this automatic
the normal position of the personnel, from any other signals.
turning from the bridge is to be possible.
6.1.2 Sufficient information is to be provided for proper
4.4 Automatic control of propulsion and handling of alarms.
manoeuvring units
6.1.3 The alarm system is to be of the self-check type; fail-
ure within the alarm system, including the outside connec-
4.4.1 When the power source actuating the automatic con-
tion, is to activate an alarm. The alarm circuits are to be
trol of propelling units fails, an alarm is to be triggered. In
independent from each other. All alarm circuits are to be
such case, the preset direction of thrust is to be maintained
protected so as not to endanger each other.
long enough to allow the intervention of engineers. Failing
this, minimum arrangements, such as stopping of the shaft
line, are to be provided to prevent any unexpected reverse 6.2 Alarm functions
of the thrust. Such stopping may be automatic or ordered by
the operator, following an appropriate indication. 6.2.1 Alarm activation
Alarms are to be activated when abnormal conditions
appear in the machinery, which need the intervention of
4.5 Clutches personnel on duty, and on the automatic change-over, when
standby machines are installed.
4.5.1 Where the clutch of a propulsion engine is operated
electrically, pneumatically or hydraulically, an alarm is to An existing alarm is not to prevent the indication of any fur-
be given at the control station in the event of loss of energy; ther fault.
as far as practicable, this alarm is to be triggered while it is
6.2.2 Acknowledgement of alarm
still possible to operate the equipment (see Note 1 in
[4.2.1]). The acknowledgment of an alarm consists in manually
silencing the audible signal and additional visual signals
4.5.2 When only one clutch is installed, its control is to be (e.g. rotating light signals) while leaving the visual signal on
fail-set. Other arrangements may be considered in relation the active control station. Acknowledged alarms are to be
to the configuration of the propulsion machinery. clearly distinguishable from unacknowledged alarms.
Acknowledgement should not prevent the audible signal to
operate for new alarm.
4.6 Brakes
Alarms shall be maintained until they are accepted and vis-
4.6.1 Automatic or remote controlled braking is to be pos- ual indications of individual alarms shall remain until the
sible only if: fault has been corrected, when the alarm system shall auto-
matically reset to the normal operating condition.
• propulsion power has been shut off
Acknowledgement of alarms is only to be possible at the
• the turning gear is disconnected active control station.
• the shaftline speed (r.p.m.) is below the threshold stated Alarms, including the detection of transient faults, are to be
by the builder (see Note 1 in [4.2.1]). maintained until acknowledgement of the visual indication.

April 2007 Bureau Veritas 107

Pt C, Ch 3, Sec 2

Acknowledgement of visual signals is to be separate for • the operation of the machinery is temporarily adjusted
each signal or common to a limited group of signals. to the prevailing abnormal conditions (e.g. by reducing
Acknowledgement is only to be possible when the user has the output of the associated machinery), or
visual information on the alarm condition for the signal or
all signals in a group. • the machinery is protected, as far as possible, from criti-
cal conditions by shutting off the fuel or power supply,
thereby stopping the machinery (shutdown), or appro-
6.2.3 Locking of alarms
priate shutdown.
Manual locking of separate alarms may be accepted when
this is clearly indicated. 7.2.2 Safety indication

Locking of alarm and safety functions in certain operating When the safety system has been activated, it is to be possi-
modes (e.g. during start-up or trimming) is to be automati- ble to trace the cause of the safety action. This is to be
cally disabled in other modes. accomplished by means of a central or local indication.

When a safety system is made inoperative by a manual

6.2.4 Time delay of alarms override, this is to be clearly indicated at corresponding
It is to be possible to delay alarm activation in order to control stations.
avoid false alarms due to normal transient conditions (e.g.
Automatic safety actions are to activate an alarm at prede-
during start-up or trimming).
fined control stations.

6.2.5 Engineers’ alarm

7.3 Shutdown
An engineers’ alarm shall be provided to be operated from
the engine control room or at the manoeuvring platform as
appropriate, and shall be clearly audible in the engineers’ 7.3.1 For shutdown systems of machinery, the following
accommodation. requirements are to be applied:

• when the system has stopped a machine, the latter is not

6.2.6 Transfer of responsibility to be restarted automatically before a manual reset of
the safety system has been carried out
Where several alarm control stations located in different
spaces are provided, responsibility for alarms is not to be • the shutdown of the propulsion system is to be limited
transferred before being acknowledged by the receiving to those cases which could lead to serious damage,
location. Transfer of responsibility is to give an audible complete breakdown or explosion.
warning. At each control station it is to be indicated which
location is in charge.
7.4 Standby systems

7 Safety system 7.4.1 For the automatic starting system of the standby units,
the following requirements are to be applied:
7.1 Design • faults in the electrical or mechanical system of the run-
ning machinery are not to prevent the standby machin-
7.1.1 System failures ery from being automatically started

A safety system is to be designed so as to limit the conse- • when a machine is on standby, ready to be automati-
quence of failures. It is to be constructed on the fail-to- cally started, this is to be clearly indicated at its control
safety principle. position

The safety system is to be of the self-check type; as a rule, • the change-over to the standby unit is to be indicated by
failure within the safety system, including the outside con- a visual and audible alarm
nection, is to activate an alarm.
• means are to be provided close to the machine, to pre-
vent undesired automatic or remote starting (e.g. when
7.2 Function the machine is being repaired)

• automatic starting is to be prevented when conditions

7.2.1 Safety activation are present which could endanger the standby machine.
The safety system is to be activated automatically in the
event of identified conditions which could lead to damage
7.5 Testing
of associated machinery or systems, such that:

• normal operating conditions are restored (e.g. by the 7.5.1 The safety systems are to be tested in accordance
starting of the standby unit), or with the requirements in Ch 3, Sec 6.

108 Bureau Veritas April 2007

 Pt C, Ch 3, Sec 3

SECTION 3 COMPUTER BASED SYSTEMS

1 General requirements 1.5.3 The failure and restarting of computer based systems
should not cause processes to enter undefined or critical
states.
1.1 General
1.1.1 The characteristics of the system are to be compatible 1.6 System redundancy
with the intended applications, under normal and abnormal
1.6.1 If it is demonstrated that the failure of the system,
process conditions. The response time for alarm function is
which includes the computer based system, leads to a dis-
to be less than 5 seconds.
ruption of the essential services, a secondary independent
1.1.2 When systems under control are required to be dupli- means, of appropriate diversity, is to be available to restore
cated and in separate compartments, this is also to apply to the adequate functionality of the service.
control elements within computer based systems.
2 Hardware
1.1.3 As a rule, computer based systems intended for
essential services are to be type approved.
2.1 General
1.2 System type approval 2.1.1 The construction of systems is to comply with the
requirements of Ch 3, Sec 4.
1.2.1 The type approval is to cover the hardware and basic
software of the system. The type approval requirements are 2.2 Housing
detailed in Ch 3, Sec 6. A list of the documents to be sub-
mitted is provided in Ch 3, Sec 1. 2.2.1 The housing of the system is to be designed to face
the environmental conditions, as defined in Ch 2, Sec 2,
1.3 System operation [1], in which it will be installed. The design will be such as
to protect the printed circuit board and associated compo-
1.3.1 The system is to be protected so that authorised per- nents from external aggression. When required, the cooling
sonnel only can modify any setting which could alter the system is to be monitored, and an alarm activated when the
system. normal temperature is exceeded.

1.3.2 Modification of the configuration, set points or 2.2.2 The mechanical construction is to be designed to
parameters is to be possible without complex operations withstand the vibration levels defined in Ch 2, Sec 2,
such as compilation or coded data insertion. depending on the applicable environmental condition.

1.3.3 Program and data storage of the system is to be 3 Software

designed so as not to be altered by environmental conditions,
as defined in Ch 2, Sec 2, [1], or loss of the power supply.
3.1 General
1.4 System reliability 3.1.1 The basic software is to be developed in consistent
and independent modules.
1.4.1 System reliability is to be documented as required in A self-checking function is to be provided to identify failure
Ch 3, Sec 1, [2.3.4]. of software module.
1.4.2 When used for alarm, safety or control functions, the When hardware (e.g. input /output devices, communication
hardware system design is to be on the fail safe principle. links, memory, etc.) is arranged to limit the consequences of
failures, the corresponding software is also to be separated
in different software modules ensuring the same degree of
1.5 System failure
independence.
1.5.1 In the event of failure of part of the system, the 3.1.2 Computer based systems are to be configured with
remaining system is to be brought to a downgraded opera- type approved software according to Ch 3, Sec 6, [2.3].
ble condition.
3.1.3 Application software is to be tested in accordance
1.5.2 A self-monitoring device is to be implemented so as with Ch 3, Sec 6, [3.3].
to check the proper function of hardware and software in
the system. This is to include a self-check facility of input 3.1.4 Loading of software, when necessary, is to be per-
/output cards, as far as possible. formed in the aided conversational mode.

April 2007 Bureau Veritas 109

Pt C, Ch 3, Sec 3

3.1.5 Software versions are to be solely identified by 4.3 Transmission software

number, date or other appropriate means. Modifications are
not to be made without also changing the version identifier. 4.3.1 The transmission software is to be so designed that
A record of changes is to be maintained and made available alarm or control data have priority over any other data. For
upon request of the Society. control data, the transmission time is not to jeopardise effi-
ciency of the functions.
3.2 Software development quality 4.3.2 The transmission protocol is preferably to be chosen
among international standards.
3.2.1 Software development is to be carried out according
to a quality plan defined by the builder and records are to 4.3.3 A means of transmission control is to be provided
be kept. The standard ISO 9000-1, or equivalent interna- and designed so as to verify the completion of the data
tional standard, is to be taken as guidance for the quality transmitted (CRC or equivalent acceptable method). When
procedure. The quality plan is to include the test procedure corrupted data is detected, the number of retries is to be
for software and the results of tests are to be documented. limited so as to keep an acceptable global response time.
The duration of the message is to be such that it does not
4 Data transmission link block the transmission of other stations.

4.1 General 4.4 Transmission operation

4.4.1 When a hardware or software transmission failure

4.1.1 The performance of the network transmission
occurs, an alarm is to be activated. A means is to be pro-
medium (transfer rate and time delay) is to be compatible
vided to verify the activity of transmission and its proper
with the intended application.
function (positive information).
4.1.2 When the master /slave configuration is installed, the
master terminal is to be indicated on the other terminals. 4.5 Redundant network

4.5.1 Where two or more essential functions are using the

4.2 Hardware support same network, redundant networks are required according
to the conditions mentioned in [1.6.1].
4.2.1 The data transmission is to be self-checked, regarding
both the network transmission medium and the inter- 4.5.2 Switching of redundant networks from one to the other
faces/connections. is to be achieved without alteration of the performance.
The data communication link is to be automatically started
when power is turned on, or restarted after loss of power. 4.5.3 When not in operation, the redundant network is to
be permanently monitored, so that any failure of either net-
4.2.2 The choice of transmission cable is to be made work may be readily detected. When a failure occurs in one
according to the environmental conditions. Particular atten- network, an alarm is to be activated.
tion is to be given to the level characteristics required for
electromagnetic interferences. 4.5.4 In redundant networks, the two networks are to be
mutually independent. Failure of any common components
4.2.3 The installation of transmission cables is to comply is not to result in any degradation in performance.
with the requirements stated in Ch 2, Sec 11. In addition,
4.5.5 When redundant data communication links are
the routing of transmission cables is to be chosen so as to be
required, they are to be routed separately, as far as practicable.
in less exposed zones regarding mechanical, chemical or
EMI damage. As far as possible, the routing of each cable is
to be independent of any other cable. These cables are not 5 Man-machine interface
normally allowed to be routed in bunches with other cables
on the cable tray. 5.1 General
4.2.4 The coupling devices are to be designed, as far as 5.1.1 The design of the operator interface is to follow ergo-
practicable, so that in the event of a single fault, they do not nomic principles. The standard IEC 60447 Man-machine
alter the network function. When a failure occurs, an alarm interface or equivalent recognised standard may be used.
is to be activated.
Addition of coupling devices is not to alter the network 5.2 System functional indication
function.
Hardware connecting devices are to be chosen, when pos- 5.2.1 A means is to be provided to verify the activity of the
sible, in accordance with international standards. system, or subsystem, and its proper function.

When a computer based system is used with a non-essential 5.2.2 A visual and audible alarm is to be activated in the
system and connected to a network used for essential sys- event of malfunction of the system, or subsystem. This alarm
tems, the coupling device is to be of an approved type. is to be such that identification of the failure is simplified.

110 Bureau Veritas April 2007

 Pt C, Ch 3, Sec 3

5.3 Input devices 5.5 Workstations

5.5.1 The number of workstations at control stations is to

5.3.1 Input devices are to be positioned such that the oper-
be sufficient to ensure that all functions may be provided
ator has a clear view of the related display.
with any one unit out of operation, taking into account any
The operation of input devices, when installed, is to be log- functions which are required to be continuously available.
ical and correspond to the direction of action of the control-
led equipment. 5.5.2 Multifunction workstations for control and display
are to be redundant and interchangeable.
The user is to be provided with positive confirmation of
action. 5.5.3 The choice of colour, graphic symbols, etc. is to be
consistent in all systems on board.
Control of essential functions is only to be available at one
control station at any time. Failing this, conflicting control 5.6 Computer dialogue
commands are to be prevented by means of interlocks and
/or warnings. 5.6.1 The computer dialogue is to be as simple and self-
explanatory as possible.
5.3.2 When keys are used for common/important controls, The screen content is to be logically structured and show
and several functions are assigned to such keys, the active only what is relevant to the user.
function is to be recognisable. Menus are to be organised so as to have rapid access to the
most frequently used functions.
If use of a key may have unwanted consequences, provision
is to be made to prevent an instruction from being executed 5.6.2 A means to go back to a safe state is always to be
by a single action (e.g. simultaneous use of 2 keys, repeated accessible.
use of a key, etc.).
5.6.3 A clear warning is to be displayed when using func-
Means are to be provided to check validity of the manual tions such as alteration of control condition, or change of
input data into the system (e.g. checking the number of data or programs in the memory of the system.
characters, range value, etc.).
5.6.4 A ‘wait’ indication is to warn the operator when the
5.3.3 If use of a push button may have unwanted conse- system is executing an operation.
quences, provision is to be made to prevent an instruction
from being executed by a single action (e.g. simultaneous 6 Integrated systems
use of 2 push buttons, repeated use of push buttons, etc.).
Alternatively, this push button is to be protected against
accidental activation by a suitable cover, or use of a pull
6.1 General
button, if applicable.
6.1.1 Operation with an integrated system is to be at least
as effective as it would be with individual, stand alone
5.4 Output devices equipment.

6.1.2 Failure of one part (individual module, equipment or

5.4.1 VDU’s (video display units) and other output devices subsystem) of the integrated system is not to affect the func-
are to be suitably lighted and dimmable when installed in tionality of other parts, except for those functions directly
the wheelhouse. The adjustment of brightness and colour of dependant on information from the defective part.
VDU’s is to be limited to a minimum discernable level.
6.1.3 A failure in connection between parts, cards connec-
When VDU’s are used for alarm purposes, the alarm signal, tions or cable connections is not to affect the independent
required by the Rules, is to be displayed whatever the other functionality of each connected part.
information on the screen. The alarms are to be displayed
according to the sequence of occurrence. 6.1.4 Alarm messages for essential functions are to have
priority over any other information presented on the display.
When alarms are displayed on a colour VDU, it is to be
possible to distinguish alarm in the event of failure of a pri-
mary colour. 7 Expert system

The position of the VDU is to be such as to be easily reada- 7.1

ble from the normal position of the personnel on watch. The
size of the screen and characters is to be chosen accordingly. 7.1.1 The expert system software is not to be implemented
on a computer linked with essential functions.
When several control stations are provided in different
spaces, an indication of the station in control is to be dis- 7.1.2 Expert system software is not to be used for direct
played at each control station. Transfer of control is to be control or operation, and needs human validation by per-
effected smoothly and without interruption to the service. sonnel on watch.

April 2007 Bureau Veritas 111

Pt C, Ch 3, Sec 3

8 System testing 9 System maintenance

8.1 9.1 Maintenance

8.1.1 The system tests are to be carried out according to Ch 9.1.1 System maintenance is to be planned and docu-
3, Sec 6. mented.

8.1.2 All alterations of a system (hardware and software) 9.1.2 Remote software maintenance amy be considered on
are to be tested and the results of tests documented. case by case basis.

112 Bureau Veritas April 2007

 Pt C, Ch 3, Sec 4

SECTION 4 CONSTRUCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS

1 General 2.1.3 When plug-in connectors or plug-in elements are used,

their contacts are not to be exposed to excessive mechanical
loads. They are to be provided with a locking device.
1.1 General
2.1.4 All replaceable parts are to be so arranged that it is
1.1.1 Automation systems are to be so constructed as:
not possible to connect them incorrectly or to use incorrect
• to withstand the environmental conditions the environ- replacements. Where this not practicable, the replacement
mental conditions, as defined in Ch 2, Sec 2, [1], in parts as well as the associated connecting devices are to be
which they operate clearly identified. In particular, all connection terminals are
• to have necessary facilities for maintenance work. to be properly tagged. When replacement cannot be carried
out with the system on, a warning sign is to be provided.
1.2 Materials
2.1.5 Forced cooling systems are to be avoided. Where
1.2.1 Materials are generally to be of the flame-retardant forced cooling is installed, an alarm is to be provided in the
type. event of failure of the cooling system.

1.2.2 Connectors are to be able to withstand standard 2.1.6 The interface connection is to be so designed to
vibrations, mechanical constraints and corrosion conditions receive the cables required. The cables are to be chosen
as given in Ch 3, Sec 6. according to Ch 2, Sec 3.

1.3 Component design 2.2 Electronic system

2.2.1 Printed circuit boards are to be so designed that they
1.3.1 Automation components are to be designed to sim-
are properly protected against the normal aggression
plify maintenance operations. They are to be so constructed
expected in their environment.
as to have:
• easy identification of failures 2.2.2 Electronic systems are to be constructed taking
• easy access to replaceable parts account of electromagnetic interferences.
• easy installation and safe handling in the event of Special precautions are to be taken for:
replacement of parts (plug and play principle) without • measuring elements such as the analogue amplifier or
impairing the operational capability of the system, as far analog/digital converter; and
as practicable • connecting different systems having different ground
• facility for adjustment of set points or calibration references.
• test point facilities, to verify the proper operation of
2.2.3 The components of electronic systems (printed circuit
components.
board, electronic components) are to be clearly identifiable
with reference to the relevant documentation.
1.4 Environmental and supply conditions
2.2.4 Where adjustable set points are available, they are to
1.4.1 The environmental and supply conditions are speci- be readily identifiable and suitable means are to be pro-
fied in Ch 3, Sec 1. Specific environmental conditions are to vided to protect them against changes due to vibrations and
be considered for air temperature and humidity, vibrations, uncontrolled access.
corrosion from chemicals and mechanical or biological
attacks. 2.2.5 The choice of electronic components is to be made
according to the normal environmental conditions, in par-
ticular the temperature rating.
2 Electrical and/or electronic systems
2.2.6 All stages of fabrication of printed circuit boards are
2.1 General to be subjected to quality control. Evidence of this control is
to be documented.
2.1.1 Electrical and electronic equipment is to comply with
the requirements of Part C, Chapter 2 and Part C, Chapter 3. 2.2.7 Burn-in tests or equivalent tests are to be performed.

2.1.2 A separation is to be done between any electrical 2.2.8 The programmable components are to be clearly
components and liquids, if they are in a same enclosure. tagged with the program date and reference.
Necessary drainage will be provided where liquids are Components are to be protected against outside alteration
likely to leak. when loaded.

April 2007 Bureau Veritas 113

Pt C, Ch 3, Sec 4

2.3 Electrical system 5 Automation consoles

2.3.1 Cables and insulated conductors used for internal
5.1 General
wiring are to be at least of the flame-retardant type, and are
to comply with the requirements in Part C, Chapter 2. 5.1.1 Automation consoles are to be designed on ergo-
nomic principles. Handrails are to be fitted for safe opera-
2.3.2 If specific products (e.g. oil) are likely to come into
tion of the console.
contact with wire insulation, the latter is to be resistant to
such products or properly shielded from them, and to com-
ply with the requirements in Part C, Chapter 2. 5.2 Indicating instruments
5.2.1 The operator is to receive feed back information on
3 Pneumatic systems the effects of his orders.

5.2.2 Indicating instruments and controls are to be

3.1
arranged according to the logic of the system in control. In
3.1.1 Pneumatic automation systems are to comply with addition, the operating movement and the resulting move-
ment of the indicating instrument are to be consistent with
Ch 1, Sec 10, [17].
each other.
3.1.2 Pneumatic circuits of automation systems are to be
5.2.3 The instruments are to be clearly labelled. When
independent of any other pneumatic circuit on board.
installed in the wheelhouse, all lighted instruments of con-
soles are to be dimmable, where necessary.
4 Hydraulic systems
5.3 VDU’s and keyboards
4.1
5.3.1 VDU’s in consoles are to be located so as to be easily
4.1.1 Hydraulic automation systems are to comply with readable from the normal position of the operator. The
Ch 1, Sec 10, [14]. environmental lighting is not to create any reflection which
makes reading difficult.
4.1.2 Suitable filtering devices are to be incorporated into
the hydraulic circuits. 5.3.2 The keyboard is to be located to give easy access
from the normal position of the operator. Special precau-
4.1.3 Hydraulic circuits of automation systems are to be tions are to be taken to avoid inadvertent operation of the
independent of any other hydraulic circuit on board. keyboard.

114 Bureau Veritas April 2007

 Pt C, Ch 3, Sec 5

SECTION 5 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

1 General 2.2 Temperature elements

2.2.1 Temperature sensors, thermostats or thermometers
1.1 are to be installed in a thermowell of suitable material, to
permit easy replacement and functional testing. The ther-
1.1.1 Automation systems are to be installed taking into mowell is not to significantly modify the response time of
account: the whole element.
• the maintenance requirements (test and replacement of
systems or components) 2.3 Pressure elements
• the influence of EMI. The IEC 60533 standard is to be 2.3.1 Three-way valves or other suitable arrangements are
taken as guidance to be installed to permit functional testing of pressure ele-
• the environmental conditions corresponding to the loca- ments, such as pressure sensors, pressure switches, without
tion in accordance with Ch 2, Sec 1and Ch 2, Sec 3, [6]. stopping the installation.

2.3.2 In specific applications, where high pulsations of

1.1.2 Control stations are to be arranged for the conven- pressure are likely to occur, a damping element, such as a
ience of the operator. capillary tube or equivalent, is to be installed.

1.1.3 Automation components are to be properly fitted.

Screws and nuts are to be locked, where necessary.
2.4 Level switches
2.4.1 Level switches fitted to flammable oil tanks, or similar
2 Sensors and components installations, are to be installed so as to reduce the risk of
fire.

2.1 General
3 Cables
2.1.1 The location and selection of the sensor is to be done
so as to measure the actual value of the parameter. Temper- 3.1 Installation
ature, vibration and EMI levels are to be taken into account.
3.1.1 Cables are to be installed according to the require-
When this is not possible, the sensor is to be designed to
ments in Ch 2, Sec 12, [7].
withstand the local environment.
3.1.2 Suitable installation features such as screening and/or
2.1.2 The enclosure of the sensor and the cable entry are to twisted pairs and/or separation between signal and other
be appropriate to the space in which they are located. cables are to be provided in order to avoid possible interfer-
ence on control and instrumentation cables.
2.1.3 Means are to be provided for testing, calibration and
replacement of automation components. Such means are to 3.1.3 Specific transmission cables (coaxial cables, twisted
be designed, as far as practicable, so as to avoid perturba- pairs, etc.) are to be routed in specific cable-ways and
tion of the normal operation of the system. mechanically protected to avoid loss of any important trans-
mitted data. Where there is a high risk of mechanical dam-
2.1.4 A tag number is to identify automation components age, the cables are to be protected with pipes or equivalent.
and is to be clearly marked and attached to the component.
These tag numbers are to be collected on the instrument list 3.1.4 The cable bend radius is to be in accordance with the
mentioned in Ch 3, Sec 1, Tab 1. requirements of Ch 2, Sec 12, [7.2].
For mineral insulated cables, coaxial cables or fibre optic
2.1.5 Electrical connections are to be arranged for easy cables, whose characteristics may be modified, special pre-
replacement and testing of sensors and components. They cautions are to be taken according to the manufacturer’s
are to be clearly marked. instructions.

2.1.6 Low level signal sensors are to be avoided. When 3.2 Cable terminations
installed they are to be located as close as possible to
amplifiers, so as to avoid external influences. Failing this, 3.2.1 Cable terminations are to be arranged according to
the wiring is to be provided with suitable EMI protection the requirements in Part C, Chapter 2. Particular attention is
and temperature correction. to be paid to the connections of cable shields. Shields are to

April 2007 Bureau Veritas 115

Pt C, Ch 3, Sec 5

be connected only at the sensor end when the sensor is 4.1.2 As far as practicable, piping containing liquids is not to
earthed, and only at the processor end when the sensor is be installed in or adjacent to electrical enclosures (see Ch 3,
floating. Sec 4, [2.1.2]).

3.2.2 Cable terminations are to be able to withstand the 4.1.3 Hydraulic and pneumatic piping for automation sys-
identified environmental conditions (shocks, vibrations, salt tems is to be marked to indicate its function.
mist, humidity, etc.).

3.2.3 Terminations of all special cables such as mineral

5 Automation consoles
insulated cables, coaxial cables or fibre optic cables are to
be arranged according to the manufacturer’s instructions. 5.1 General

5.1.1 Consoles or control panels are to be located so as to

4 Pipes enable a good view of the process under control, as far as
practicable. Instruments are to be clearly readable in the
4.1 ambient lighting.

4.1.1 For installation of piping circuits used for automation 5.1.2 The location is to be such as to allow easy access for
purposes, see the requirements in Ch 1, Sec 10. maintenance operations.

116 Bureau Veritas April 2007

 Pt C, Ch 3, Sec 6

SECTION 6 TESTING

1 General 2 Type approval

1.1 General 2.1 General

1.1.1 Automation systems are to be tested for type 2.1.1 The following requirements are applicable, but not
approval, at works and on board, when required. Tests are confined, to all electrical, control and instrumentation sys-
to be carried out under the supervision of a Surveyor of the tems which are intended to be type approved for use in
Society. marine applications. In particular, they apply to control,
protection, safety devices and internal communication.
1.1.2 The type testing conditions for electrical, control and
instrumentation equipment, computers and peripherals are 2.1.2 The necessary documents to be submitted, prior to
described in [2]. type testing, are listed in Ch 3, Sec 1, [2.4.1]. The type
approval of automation systems refers to hardware type
1.1.3 Automation systems are to be inspected at works, approval or software type approval, as applicable.
according to the requirements of [3], in order to check that
the construction complies with the Rules. 2.2 Hardware type approval
1.1.4 Automation systems are to be tested when installed 2.2.1 Hardware type approval of automation systems is
on board and prior to sea trials, to verify their performance obtained subject to the successful outcome of the tests
and adaptation on site, according to [4]. described in Tab 1.

Table 1 : Type tests

N° Test Procedure (6) Test parameters Other information

1 Visual − − • drawings, design data
inspection
2 Performance Manufacturer perform- • standard atmosphere conditions • confirmation that operation is in accord-
test ance test programme • temperature: 25°C ± 10°C ance with the requirements specified for
based upon specifica- • relative humidity: 60% ± 30% particular automatic systems or equipment
tion and relevant rule • air pressure: 96 KPa ± 10 KPa • checking of self-monitoring features
requirements • checking of specified protection against an
access to the memory
• checking against effect of unerroneous use
of control elements in the case of computer
systems
3 Power supply − • 3 interruptions during 5 minutes • verification of the specified action of the
failure • switching- off time 30 s each case equipment on loss and restoration of sup-
ply in accordance with the system design
• verification of possible corruption of pro-
gramme or data held in programmable
electronic systems, where applicable
• the time of 5 minutes may be exceeded if
the equipment under test needs a longer
time for start up , e.g. booting sequence
• for equipment which requires booting, one
additional power supply interruption dur-
ing booting to be performed

April 2007 Bureau Veritas 117

Pt C, Ch 3, Sec 6

N° Test Procedure (6) Test parameters Other information

4a Electric A.C. − COMBINATION
power supply
Voltage variation Frequency varia-
variations
permanent tion permanent
+ 6% + 5%
+ 6% – 5%
– 10% – 5%
– 10% + 5%
voltage transient frequency transient
1,5 s 5s
+ 20% + 10%
– 20% – 10%
4b Electric D.C. − Voltage tolerance continuous: ± 10%
power supply Voltage cyclic variation: 5%
variations Voltage ripple: 10%
Electric battery supply:
• + 30% to – 25% for equipment
connected to the battery during
charging
• + 20% to – 25% for equipment not
connected to the battery
4c Pneumatic and − Pressure: ± 20%
hydraulic Duration: 15 minutes
power supply
variations
5 Dry heat IEC Publication 60068- • Temperature: 55°C ± 2°C • equipment operating during conditioning
2-2 Duration: 16 hours, or and testing
• Temperature: 70°C ± 2°C • functional test during the last hour at the
Duration: 2 hours (see (1)) test temperature

6 Damp heat IEC Publication 60068- Temperature: 55°C • measurement of insulation resistance
2-30 Test Db Humidity: 95% before test
Duration: 2 cycles (12 + 12 hours) • equipment operating during the complete
first cycle and switched off during second
cycle except for functional test
• functional test during the first 2 hours of
the first cycle at the test temperature and
during the last 2 hours of the second cycle
at the test temperature
• recovery at standard atmosphere condi-
tions
• insulation resistance measurements and
performance test

118 Bureau Veritas April 2007

 Pt C, Ch 3, Sec 6

N° Test Procedure (6) Test parameters Other information

7 Vibration IEC Publication 60068- • 2 Hz ± 3/0 Hz to 13,2 Hz • duration 90 minutes at 30 Hz in case of no
2-6 Test Fc amplitude: ± 1mm resonance condition
• 13,2 Hz to 100 Hz • duration 90 minutes at each resonance fre-
acceleration: ± 0,7 g quency at which Q ≥ 2 is recorded
For severe vibration conditions such • during the vibration test, functional tests
as, e. g., on diesel engines, air com- are to be carried out
pressors, etc.: • tests to be carried out in three mutually
• 2,0 Hz to 25 Hz perpendicular planes
amplitude: ± 1,6 mm • it is recommended as a guidance that Q
• 25 Hz to 100 Hz does not exceed 5
acceleration: ± 4,0 g • duration 120 minutes where sweep test is
Note: Very special conditions may to be carried out instead of discrete fre-
exist for example on exhaust mani- quency test and a number of resonant fre-
folds of diesel engines especially for quencies is detected close to each other.
medium and high speed engines. Sweep over a restricted frequency range
Values may be required to be in these between 0.8 and 1.2 times the critical fre-
cases: quencies can be used where appropriate.
• 40 Hz to 2000 Hz Note: Critical frequency is a frequency at
which the equipment being tested may
• acceleration: ± 10,0 g at 600°C
exhibit:
• malfunction and/or performance dete-
rioration
• mechanical resonances and/or other
response effects occur, e.g. chatter
8 Inclination IEC Publication 60092- Static 22,5° a) inclined to the vertical at an angle of at
504 least 22,5°
b) inclined to at least 22,5° on the other side
of the vertical and in the same plane as in a)
c) inclined to the vertical at an angle of at
least 22,5° in plane at right angles to that
used in a)
d) inclined to at least 22,5° on the other side
of the vertical and in the same plane as in c)
Note: The period of testing in each position
should be sufficient to fully evaluate the behav-
iour of the equipment
Dynamic 22,5° Using the directions defined in a) to d) above,
the equipment is to be rolled to an angle of
22,5° each side of the vertical with a period of
10 seconds
The test in each direction is to be carried out
for not less than 15 minutes
Note: These inclination tests are normally not
required for equipment with no moving parts.
9 Insulation Rated Test Minimum insulation resistance • insulation resistance test is to be carried
resistance supply voltage out before and after: damp heat test, cold
voltage before after test, salt mist test and high voltage test
• between all phases and earth, and where
Un ≤ 65 V 2 x Un 10 Mohms 1,0 Mohms
appropriate between the phases
min. 24 V
Note: Certain components, e. g. for EMC pro-
Un > 65V 500 V 100 Mohms 10 Mohms tection, may be required to be disconnected
for this test

April 2007 Bureau Veritas 119

Pt C, Ch 3, Sec 6

N° Test Procedure (6) Test parameters Other information

10 High voltage Rated voltage Test voltage • separate circuits are to be tested against
Un (A.C. voltage 50 or 60Hz) each other and all circuits connected with
each other tested against earth
Up to 65 V 2 x Un + 500 V
• printed circuits with electronic compo-
66 V to 250 V 1500 V nents may be removed during the test
251 V to 500 V 2000 V • period of application of the test voltage:
1 minute
501 V to 690 V 2500 V
Note: Certain components, e. g. printed cir-
cuits with electronic components, may be
required to be disconnected for this test
11 Cold IEC Publication 60068- • Temperature: +5°C ± 3°C • initial measurement of insulation resistance
2-1 Duration: 2 hours, or • equipment not operating during condition-
• Temperature: –25°C ± 3°C ing and testing except for functional test
Duration: 2 hours (see (2)) • functional test during the last hour at the
test temperature
• insulation resistance measurement and the
functional test after recovery
12 Salt mist IEC Publication 60068- Four spraying periods with a storage of • initial measurement of insulation resistance
2-52 Test Kb seven days after each and initial functional test
• equipment not operating during condition-
ing
• functional test on the 7th day of each stor-
age period
• insulation resistance measurement and
performance test 4 to 6h after recovery (see
(3))
13 Electrostatic IEC 61000-4-2 Contact discharge: 6 kV • to simulate electrostatic discharge as may
discharge Air discharge: 8 kV occur when persons touch the appliance
Interval between single discharges: • the test is to be confined to the points and
1 sec. surfaces that can normally be reached by
No. of pulses: 10 per polarity the operator
According to level 3 severity standard • performance criterion B (see (4))

14 Radiated Radio IEC 61000-4-3 Frequency range: • to simulate electromagnetic fields radiated
Frequency 80 MHz to 2 GHz by different transmitters
Modulation**: 80% AM at 1000Hz • the test is to be confined to the appliances
Field strength: 10V/m exposed to direct radiation by transmitters
Frequency sweep rate: at their place of installation
≤ 1,5.10-3 decades/s (or 1% / 3 sec) • performance criterion A (see (5))
According to level 3 severity standard ** If, for tests of equipment, an input signal
with a modulation frequency of 1000 Hz is
necessary, a modulation frequency of 400 Hz
should be chosen
15 Conducted A.C.: • to simulate distortions in the power supply
Audio • Frequency range: rated frequency system generated, for instance, by elec-
Frequency to 200th harmonic tronic consumers and coupled in as har-
• Test voltage (rms): 10% of supply monics
to 15th harmonic reducing to 1% • see figure “Test set-up” (see (8))
at 100th harmonic and maintain • performance criterion A (see (5))
this level to the 200th harmonic,
min 3 V r.m.s, max. 2 W
D.C.:
• Frequency range: 50 Hz - 10 kHz
• Test voltage (rms) :10% of supply,
max. 2 W

120 Bureau Veritas April 2007

 Pt C, Ch 3, Sec 6

N° Test Procedure (6) Test parameters Other information

16 Conducted IEC 61000-4-6 AC, DC, I/O ports and signal/control • to simulate electromagnetic fields coupled
Radio lines as high frequency into the test specimen
Frequency Frequency range: 150 kHz - 80 MHz via the connecting lines
Amplitude: 3 V rms (see (7)) • performance criterion A (see (5))
Modulation***: 80% AM at 1000 Hz *** If, for tests of equipment, an input signal
Frequency sweep range: with a modulation frequency of 1000 Hz is
≤ 1,5.10-3 decades/s (or 1% / 3sec.) necessary, a modulation frequency of 400 Hz
should be chosen
According to level 2 severity standard
17 Burst/ Fast IEC 61000-4-4 Single pulse time: 5ns (between 10% • arcs generated when actuating
Transients and 90% value) electrical contacts
Single pulse width: 50 ns (50% value) • interface effect occurring on the power
Amplitude (peak): 2 kV line on power supply, as well as at the external
supply port/earth; 1 kV on I/O data wiring of the test specimen
control and communication ports • performance criterion B (see (4))
(coupling clamp)
Pulse period: 300 ms
Burst duration: 15 ms
Duration/polarity: 5 min
According to level 3 severity standard
18 Surge / Slow IEC 61000-4-5 Pulse rise time: 1,2 µVs (between 10% • to simulate interference generated, for
Transient and 90% value) instance, by switching “ON” or “OFF” high
Pulse width: 50 µVs (50% value) power inductive consumers
Amplitude (peak) : 1 kV line/earth; • test procedure in accordance with figure
0,5kV line/line 10 of the standard for equipment where
Repetition rate: ≥ 1 pulse/min power and signal lines are identical
No of pulses: 5 per polarity • performance criterion B (see (4))
Application: continuous
According to level 2 severity standard
19 Radiated CISPR 16-1, 16-2 • For equipment installed in the • procedure in accordance with the standard
Emission bridge and deck zone: but distance 3 m between equipment and
antenna
Frequency Limits:
range (MHz): (dBµV/m)
0,15 - 0,30 80- 50
0,30 - 30 50- 34
30 - 2000 54
except for:
156 - 165 24
• For equipment installed in the
general power distribution zone:
Frequency Limits:
range: (MHz) (dBµV/m)
0,150 - 0,168 80 - 75
0,168 - 30 75 - 50
30 - 100 60 - 54
100 - 2000 54
except for:
156 - 165 24

April 2007 Bureau Veritas 121

Pt C, Ch 3, Sec 6

N° Test Procedure (6) Test parameters Other information

20 Conducted CISPR 16-1, 16-2 • For equipment installed in the
Emission bridge and deck zone:
Frequency Limits:
range: (dBµV)
10 - 150 kHz 96 - 50
150 - 350 kHz 60 - 50
0,35 - 30 MHz 50
• For equipment installed in the
general power distribution zone:
Frequency range: Limits:
(dBµV)
10 - 150 kHz 120 - 69
150 - 500 kHz 79
0,50 - 30 MHz 73
21 Flame IEC 60092-101 or IEC Flame application: 5 times 15 s each • the burnt out or damaged part of the speci-
retardant 60695-11-5 Interval between each application: 15 s men by not more than 60mm long
or 1 time 30 s • no flame, no incandescence or in the
event of a flame or incandescence being
present, it shall extinguish itself within 30 s
of the removal of the needle flame without
full combustion of the test specimen
• any dripping material shall extinguish itself
in such a way as not to ignite a wraping tis-
sue. The drip height is 200 mm ± 5 mm
(1) Equipment to be mounted in consoles, housing etc. together with other equipment are to be tested with 70°C.
(2) For equipment installed in non-weather protected locations or cold locations, test is to be carried out at –25°C.
(3) Salt mist test is to be carried out for equipment installed in weather exposed areas.
(4) Performance criterion B: (for transient phenomena): The Equipment Under Test shall continue to operate as intended after the
tests. No degradation of performance or loss of function is allowed as defined in the technical specification published by the
Manufacturer. During the test, degradation or loss of function or performance which is self recoverable is however allowed but
no change of actual operating state or stored data is allowed.
(5) Performance criterion A (for continuous phenomena): The EUT shall continue to operate as intended during and after the test. No
degradation of performance or loss of function is allowed as defined in relevant equipment standard and the technical specifica-
tion published by the Manufacturer.
(6) Column 3 indicates the testing procedure which is normally to be applied. However, equivalent testing procedure may be
accepted by the Society provided that what is required in the other columns is fulfilled.
(7) For equipment installed on the bridge and deck zone, the test levels shall be increased to 10V rms for spot frequencies in accord-
ance with IEC 60945 at 2,3,4,6.2, 8.2, 12.6, 16.5, 18.8, 22, 25 MHz.
(8) Figure - Test set-up for Conducted Low Frequency - Refer to IEC Publication 60945 (1996).

Generator

Power supply

AC DC

L1 (+)

V Volmeter *)

EUT N (÷)

PE

*) Decoupling (optional)

122 Bureau Veritas April 2007

 Pt C, Ch 3, Sec 6

Vibration and salt mist testing may be performed on differ- 3 Acceptance testing
ent specimens, where applicable.
Reset of the automation system is accepted between each 3.1 General
test, where necessary.
3.1.1 Acceptance tests are generally to be carried out at the
2.2.2 The following additional tests may be required, depend- manufacturer’s facilities before the shipment of the equip-
ing on particular manufacturing or operational conditions: ment, when requested.

• mechanical endurance test Acceptance tests refer to hardware and software tests as
applicable.
• temperature shock test (e.g. 12 shocks on exhaust gas
temperature sensors from 20°C ± 5°C to maximum tem-
3.2 Hardware testing
perature of the range)
• immersion test 3.2.1 Hardware acceptance tests include, where applicable:
• oil resistance test • visual inspection
• operational tests and, in particular:
• shock test.
- tests of all alarm and safety functions
The test procedure is to be defined with the Society in each - verification of the required performance (range, cali-
case. bration, repeatability, etc.) for analogue sensors
- verification of the required performance (range, set
2.3 Software type approval points, etc.) for on/off sensors
- verification of the required performance (range,
2.3.1 Software of computer based systems are to be response time, etc.) for actuators
approved in accordance with Information Note “Software
Assessment for Shipboard Computer Based System” (NI- - verification of the required performance (full scale,
425). etc.) for indicating instruments
• endurance test (burn-in test or equivalent)
Type approval consists of an assessment of the development
quality and verification of test results. • high voltage test
• hydrostatic tests.
Assessment certificate may be issued at the request of the
manufacturer when approval is granted. Additional tests may be required by the Society.

2.3.2 Software are to be approved in association with hard- 3.2.2 Final acceptance will be granted subject to:
ware. Reference of software and hardware should be speci- • the results of the tests listed in [3.2.1]
fied in type approval certificate.
• the type test report or type approval certificate.
2.3.3 Basic software of standard type used as tools for oper-
ation of a computer based system may be accepted without 3.3 Software testing
type approval at the discretion of the Society.
3.3.1 Software acceptance tests of computer based systems
are to be carried out to verify their adaptation to their use
2.4 Navigational and radio equipment on board, and concern mainly the application software.

2.4.1 The test conditions as specified in the IEC 60945 3.3.2 The software modules of the application software are
(marine navigational and radiocommunication equipment to be tested individually and subsequently subjected to an
and systems - general requirements, methods of testing and integration test. The test results are to be documented and to
required test results) may be applied. be part of the final file. It is to be checked that:
• the development work has been carried out in accord-
2.5 Loading instruments ance with the plan
• the documentation includes the proposed test, the
2.5.1 Loading instrument approval consists of: acceptance criteria and the result.
• approval of hardware according to [2.2], unless two Repetition tests may be required to verify the consistency of
computers are available on board for loading calcula- test results.
tions only
• approval of basic software according to [2.3] 3.3.3 Software acceptance will be granted subject to:
• examination of the available documentation
• approval of application software, consisting in data veri-
fication which results in the Endorsed Test Condition • a functional test of the whole system.
according to Part B
The Society may ask for additional tests of systems which are
• installation testing according to [4]. part of safety systems or which integrate several functions.

April 2007 Bureau Veritas 123

Pt C, Ch 3, Sec 6

4 On board tests
Table 2 : On board tests

4.1 General Equipment Nature of tests

4.1.1 On board tests are to be carried out on automation Electronic Main hardware functionality
systems associated with essential services to verify their equipment
compliance with the Rules, by means of visual inspection Analogue Signal calibration, trip set point adjustment
and the performance and functionality according to Tab 2. sensors
When completed, automation systems are to be such that a
On/off sensors Simulation of parameter to verify and record
single failure, for example loss of power supply, is not to the set points
result in a major degradation of the propulsion or steering of
the ship. In addition, a blackout test is to be carried out to Actuators Checking of operation in whole range and
show that automation systems are continuously supplied. performance (response time, pumping)

Upon completion of on board tests, test reports are to be Reading Checking of calibration, full scale and
made available to the Surveyor. instruments standard reference value

124 Bureau Veritas April 2007